645607
146
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/154
Pagina verder
TV
Art
Art 60
Art 50
Art 40
User guide
35748020
Art 40-60
User guide
2
Imprint
Loewe Technologies GmbH
Industriestraße 11
D-96317 Kronach
www.loewe.de
Printed in Germany
Editorial date 05/14-1.0c TB
© Loewe Technologies GmbH, Kronach
ID: 10.2.3.18
All rights including translation, technical modifications and errors
reserved.
Imprint
Art 40-60
User guide
3
Table of contents
Imprint ...........................................................................................2
Welcome ........................................................................................ 5
Scope of delivery .......................................................................................... 5
About this user guide ................................................................................... 5
For your safety ..............................................................................6
Basic Functions ............................................................................8
Remote control .............................................................................9
Operating controls on the TV set .............................................10
Connections rear side of the device .........................................11
Preparing the TV set .................................................................. 12
Installing the TV set .....................................................................................12
Set covers .....................................................................................................12
Connecting the TV set ................................................................................12
Bundling the cables .....................................................................................14
Preparing the remote control unit .............................................................14
Switching the TV set ON/OFF ...................................................................15
Technical information .................................................................................15
General information on menu operation ................................. 16
Info display ....................................................................................................19
Operation without remote control.............................................................19
Initial installation ...................................................................... 20
Initial installation wizard .............................................................................20
TV set as a monitor .....................................................................................31
Home view ...................................................................................32
Home - Favourites ......................................................................................33
TV ................................................................................................ 34
Setting the volume .....................................................................................34
Select station ..............................................................................................34
Status display ..............................................................................................36
Function list ................................................................................................. 37
AV list ............................................................................................................37
Electronic Programme Guide – EPG........................................................38
Teletext ..........................................................................................................41
HbbTV / MediaText ....................................................................................43
Digital Recorder ..........................................................................................44
Digital-Recorder – Overview of functions ............................................44
Archive recording .....................................................................................45
DR+ archive .............................................................................................. 47
DR
+
Streaming ........................................................................................50
Follow me function ..................................................................................50
Media
+ ......................................................................................... 51
General information on media reproduction ...........................................51
Accessing your media .................................................................................51
Video ............................................................................................52
Video playback ............................................................................................53
Audio/Radio .............................................................................. 60
Audio playback ............................................................................................61
Radio mode (DVB radio) ...........................................................................64
Radio mode (Internet radio) .....................................................................65
Photo .......................................................................................... 66
Photo display ............................................................................................... 67
Web ............................................................................................. 68
MediaNet .....................................................................................................68
Browser ........................................................................................................ 70
Extras........................................................................................... 71
Timer .............................................................................................................71
Conditional Access module (CA module) ...............................................76
DVB Common Interface Standard (CI) ................................................... 77
Special functions ........................................................................................78
Integrated features .....................................................................................78
Picture ..........................................................................................................80
Sound ........................................................................................................... 84
Stations ........................................................................................................ 85
Automatic scan TV+Radio .....................................................................86
Manual Scan TV / Radio ......................................................................... 87
Station lists TV / Radio ...........................................................................89
Compose / edit Personal list ..................................................................90
Update station list automatically ............................................................91
Control .........................................................................................................92
Language ..................................................................................................93
EPG ............................................................................................................93
Parental lock .............................................................................................94
Energy efficiency ......................................................................................95
Quick start mode .....................................................................................95
Software update.......................................................................................96
On-screen displays .................................................................................101
Time and date .........................................................................................101
DVB settings ........................................................................................... 102
DR
+
.........................................................................................................103
Standard Teletext ...................................................................................104
HbbTV ..................................................................................................... 105
CA module(s) .........................................................................................106
Record ..................................................................................................... 107
Hard disks ............................................................................................... 107
WEB key function...................................................................................108
Network settings ....................................................................................109
Multimedia settings ................................................................................112
Renderer ..................................................................................................112
Connections ............................................................................................... 113
Sound components ...............................................................................114
Antenna DVB ...........................................................................................115
AV connection settings ..........................................................................115
Digital Link ................................................................................................116
Gaming mode .........................................................................................116
Art 40-60
User guide
4
Table of contents
External devices ........................................................................117
Devices to the HDMI connections ........................................................... 117
Digital Link HD ............................................................................................118
Devices on AV .............................................................................................119
Devices on PC IN .......................................................................................121
Connecting the Audio system ................................................................ 122
Connecting the HiFi/AV amplifier ........................................................... 122
Audio playback from external devices ................................................... 123
Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12) ............................................................. 123
Operating Loewe units ............................................................................. 124
Teaching the remote control .................................................. 125
Loewe Apps ............................................................................................... 126
Loewe Apps ............................................................................... 127
Troubleshooting .......................................................................129
Technical Data ...........................................................................131
Technical data ...........................................................................131
Function of the connections ................................................................... 132
Media .......................................................................................................... 133
Signals via PC IN / HDMI ......................................................................... 134
Signal input groups .................................................................................. 134
Accessories ............................................................................... 135
Upgrade kits / conversion kits / cables ................................................ 135
Equipment variants .................................................................................. 136
Mounting options ..................................................................................... 137
Environment .............................................................................138
Glossary ....................................................................................139
EC Declaration of Conformity.................................................143
Index ..........................................................................................145
Service .......................................................................................148
Code page .................................................................................149
Notes ..........................................................................................151
Art 40-60
User guide
5
About this user guide
For best results regarding safety and the longevity of the set, we
recommend you read the chapter For your safety before switching
it on for the first time.
The glossary gives explanations of certain terms used in the TV set
and the user guide.
Paragraphs which begin with the symbol
indicate important instruc-
tions, tips or conditions for the following settings.
Terms which you will find in the menus or printed on the remote control
or TV set are written in bold type.
The necessary control elements are shown in the descriptions to the
left of the text containing the instructions for action.
In addition to the remote control, a PC keyboard can be connected to
one of the USB ports on your TV and then used to control your TV set.
In the user guide, this symbol indicates places in which
the use of a keyboard is particularly advantageous.
Depending on the connected accessory equipment the menus in the
TV set can differ from those described here.
All the station names, programme contents, the illustrated photos,
titles, albums and album covers in this user guide are examples.
The user guide instructions for your TV set is updated at irregular
intervals. We recommend checking now and then, especially after a
software update.
General information on menu operation of
the TV set
For further information on the user interface and the general operation
of your TV set see chapter General information on menu operation.
Interactive data services
In some countries the stations also broadcast interactive data services
with their programmes, leading to the functions of individual buttons
not being available or only so to a limited extent. You can find out more
about this in chapter TV, section HbbTV / MediaText.
Welcome
Thank you,
for choosing a Loewe TV set!
At Loewe we combine the highest requirements regarding technol-
ogy, design and ease of use. This applies equally for TV, video and
accessories.
In addition to sleek design and a varied combination of colour and
mounting choices, your Loewe TV set offers a host of technological
options.
Loewe Image
+
Image+ and state-of-the-art full HD LCD displays with LED backlit TV
technology guarantee the best image quality and high contrast values
and all this at lowest possible energy consumption.
Loewe Digital
+
The integrated triple tuner for DVB-T/C/S enables the reception of
standard as well as high-definition contents and thanks to the CI Plus
interface even from Pay TV.
Loewe Assist
+
The intuitive Loewe user interface Assist Media offers a simple access
to all device functions; by means of the HOME key on the remote con-
trol you can access all your favourite content as well as all multimedia
functions of your TV set.
Loewe Media
+
The Loewe Miltimedia functions offer you a multitude of options; you
have access to your photos, videos and music in your home network
or on the USB stick.
Loewe MediaNet and MediaText help you to access numerous world-
wide web-applications and contents from HbbTV services.
Loewe Connectivity
+
Network your TV set by means of numerous interconnection options.
Be it HDMI, USB, CI Plus or LAN/WLAN, discover the world of the
Loewe networking possibilities.
Scope of delivery
LCD TV set
Mains cable
Antenna cable
Remote control Assist with two batteries
Table stand
Installation instructions for table stand
Screws for table stand
Spanner
Adhesive cable tie
Quick guide
Art 40-60
User guide
6
For your safety, and to avoid unnecessary damage to your unit,
please read and follow the safety advice below:
Use for the intended purpose and ambient conditions
This TV set is intended exclusively for receiving and playing visual and
audio signals. It must not be used in rooms with a high level of humid-
ity (e.g. bathroom, sauna) or a high dust concentration (e.g. work-
shops). The manufacturer‘s warranty is only valid for use in the
specified permissible environment.
If the unit is used outdoors, make sure that it is protected from moisture
(rain, dripping water and splashing water or dew). High humidity and
dust concentrations lead to leakage currents in the device. This can
result in a shock hazard by touching it or even fire.
If you have moved the unit out of
the cold into a warm environment,
leave it switched off for about an
hour to avoid the formation of
condensation.
Do not place objects containing
liquids on top of the unit. Protect
the appliance against dripping and
splashing water.
Candles or naked flames must be
kept away from the TV set at all
times to prevent it from catching
fire.
Never place the TV set in a location where it is exposed to vibrations.
This may lead to damage.
Transporting
Move the device in vertical position only. Grasp the device on the
upper and lower edges of the housing.
If the set has to be put down during packing/unpacking, place the TV
set with its entire front surface lying flat on soft material such as a
blanket or the fleece from the packing material. Use a blanket or the
fleece from the packing material as an underlay.
The LCD screen is made of glass or plastic and can break if not handled
properly.
Always wear rubber gloves to carry the TV set if the LCD screen is
damaged and liquid crystal might be leaking out. In the case of skin
contact immediately rinse thoroughly with water.
Power supply
Incorrect voltages can damage the unit. This device may only be con-
nected to a power supply with the voltage and frequency indicated on the
type plate using the supplied mains cable. The mains plug of the TV set
must be easily accessible so that the device can be disconnected from
the mains at any time. When unplugging the unit from the mains, pull at
the connector body and not at the cable. The cables in the mains plug
could otherwise be damaged and could cause a short-circuit when
plugged in again.
Lay the mains cable so that it cannot be damaged. Do not step on
the mains cable. The mains cable may not be kinked or laid over sharp
edges nor be exposed to chemicals; the latter also applies to the unit
as a whole. A mains cable with damaged insulation can cause electric
shocks and poses a fire risk.
Air circulation and high temperatures
The vent slots on the rear panel of the set must always be kept un-
obstructed. Please do not place newspapers or cloths on/over the TV
set.
Ensure that there is at least
10 cm free space on the
sides and above the set for
air circulation, if the set is
placed in a cabinet or on a
shelf.
Like any electronic device,
your TV set requires air for
cooling. Obstruction of the
air circulation can cause fires.
Prevent metal items, nee-
dles, paper clips, liquids, wax, or similar items, from getting into the
interior of the device through the vent slots in the rear panel. Such
objects can cause short circuits in the set, which could possibly
cause a fire.
If something should get into the interior of the set then immedi-
ately unplug the mains plug of the device and contact the field service
for more information.
Note on the LCD screen
The TV set with LCD screen you have purchased satisfies the most
rigorous quality requirements and has been inspected with respect
to pixel errors. Despite of thorough care when manufacturing the
display, it cannot be 100% guaranteed that no subpixel defects will
occur due to technical reasons. Please understand that these types
of effects, as long as they are within the standard of specified limits,
cannot be considered as a device defect in terms of the guarantee.
Avoid displaying still images for long periods of time. It is possible that
a copy of the image may remain.
TV sets with 3D function
Read the following safety instructions before using the 3D function
of your TV set.
Please use the Loewe 3D TV sets only with the Loewe 3D glasses
which can be purchased as an accessory from your Loewe dealer
(see chapter Accessories).
People that have a visual disorder may not be able to perceive 3D ef-
fects or may only be able to perceive them to a limited extent. People
who are sensitive to flickering images (e.g. those with epilepsy) should
only use the 3D function after having consulted their doctor.
It might take some time for you to get used to the 3D glasses and
before you can perceive the 3D effects properly.
Stop using the 3D function immediately if you experience any feelings
of nausea, dizziness or malaise when viewing 3D content.
Supervise children whilst they are viewing 3D content, as they can be
particularly sensitive to it.
Allow more time for a break when viewing 3D films, so that you are
able to relax. Failure to do this could result in headaches, fatigue, diz-
ziness or malaise.
Position yourself comfortably in front of the 3D TV set and ensure that
you are seated firmly. By doing this, you will avoid any injuries that may
arise due to reacting to extreme 3D content.
Switch off any artificial light sources (e.g. energy saving lamp) between
the 3D TV set and the 3D glasses. These could impair the infrared
reception or the TV picture may flicker as a result.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
For your safety
Art 40-60
User guide
7
For your safety
Set-up
Loewe Flat TV sets are specified for Loewe accessories. The TV set is
suitable for different mounting options. Note the assembly instructions
regarding the different possible mounting options.
When using accessories from other manufacturers take care that the
TV set can be easily inclined or rotated on the respective mounting
option.
For mounting options from other manufacturers with motor drive,
make sure that the TV set cannot be rotated manually. The use of
mounting options from other manufacturers with locks in certain
positions is generally discouraged.
During the adjustment of the TV set it is es-
sential to ensure that the pressure exerted on
the device frame is not too large. Especially in
case of large-format displays there is a risk to
damage the screen.
Before setting up the device, please check that the final location is
suitable to bear the load of the device in terms of surface (sensitivity
to pressure) and stability (statics).
This is particularly the case for the high-gloss painted surfaces and
surfaces that are made from real wood / real wood veneer or plastic
surfaces.
Place the TV set with the table or floor stand only on a level, sturdy,
horizontal base. Particularly ensure that the set does not protrude
to the front when placed in or on pieces of furniture.
Place the TV set in a normal position for use. TV set may only be used
in an upright horizontal position. It may not be tilted by more than 10
degrees. The TV set must never be operated in portrait position, lying
flat or hanging overhead from the ceiling.
Set up the device where it is not exposed to direct sunlight and where
it is not exposed to additional warming through heating elements.
Mounting a Loewe flatscreen TV set to a holder
according to the VESA standard necessarily
requires the use of Loewe Vesa adaptor bolts
to prevent damage to the TV set.
When mounting the TV set, always check that
all four Loewe Vesa adaptor bolts are used.
The Loewe Vesa adaptor bolts are used to
ensure stability and the necessary distance
between rear wall of the TV set and Vesa-Holder (at least 5mm).
The Loewe Vesa adaptor bolts are fastened with a torque of about
4 Nm on the TV set. If you use a Vesa mounting options from other
manufacturers, you can order the Vesa adapter bolts M8x32 (No.
90458.957) at your authorized dealer of Loewe.
Supervision
Do not let children loiter and play unsupervised close to the device.
The set could tip over, be pushed off or pulled down from the stand
surface and injure someone.
Do not allow the switched-on TV set to run unattended.
Volume
Loud music can lead to ear damage. Avoid extreme volume espe-
cially over long periods and when using headphones.
±10°
D
D
Thunder storms
Pull out the mains plug and all connected antenna cables from the
TV set in a thunderstorm. Overvoltage caused by lightning strokes
can damage the set via the antenna system, as well as via the mains.
The mains plug and all connected antenna cables should also be pulled
out during long periods of absence.
Automatic shutdown
If the TV is not operated for 4 hours (adjustment of volume, pro-
gramme change, etc.) the TV will automatically switch to stand-by
mode to save energy. A prompt to terminate this shutdown process
appears one minute before expiry of the 4 hours.
The automatic shutdown is generally active for the TV mode as soon as
the energy efficiency mode Home Mode is enabled for at least one of
the six signal input groups (see chapter Technical Data, section Signal
input groups). This also applies if another energy efficiency mode is
selected during initial installation, but one of the signal input groups is
subsequently set to Home Mode.
Automatic shutdown does not occur when using the radio without
screen display (screen off).
Cleaning and care
Switch off the TV set with the main switch prior to cleaning.
Clean the TV set, the screen, and the remote control unit with a soft,
moist, clean and colour-neutral cloth only, without any aggressive
or scouring cleaning agents.
Repairs and accessories
Never remove the back of the TV set yourself. Have your TV set re-
paired or serviced by authorised television technicians only.
Only use original accessories such as Loewe stands, if possible (see
chapter Accessories).
Art 40-60
User guide
8
Basic Functions
(1
The assignment of these keys can be changed (see chapter External devices, section Operating Loewe units).
(2
The assignment of these keys can be changed (see chapter System settings, section Control – Web key function).
On/Off of the television set
Switching the TV set ON / switching it OFF in Standby
mode (Mains switch must be switched ON)
When TV set is switched on:
Press key long: Switch TV set and all CEC-capable
devices connected to the HDMI interfaces OFF to
Standby mode (System Standby).
General navigation
Navigation on the user interface, select
objects
Select station
OK short: Call station list. Or:
OK long: Call expanded station list.
 Mark station,
OK switch over to station.
Or:
P+/P– Next/previous channel
Or:
Select station with numerical keys
Sound
V+/V– Increase/reduce volume
Sound on/off
Colour key function during TV operation
Red key: Start HbbTV or value-added network
service
Yellow key: Last selected station
Blue key: Call function list
(selection of language/sound,
subtitles or channel/video track)
Function of the coloured keys in audio mode
Green key: Switch screen ON/OFF
Yellow key: Last selected station in DVB radio mode
Key functions
TV operation
Call radio mode (standard assignment)
(1
Call Home view,
Select the operating mode or the function
Pressing briefly, during screen fade-in function: Info
display,
info text appropriate to the content that can assist you
further, should you have any questions about your TV
device;
Pressing briefly without on-screen display: access
status display.
With status display open and repeatedly pressing the
key call / close the detailed information on the broad-
cast
Pressing long: show key explanation
Pressing briefly: Open the DR+ archive
Pressing long: Call up the timer list
Add current object to Home favourites
Call MediaNet (standard assignment)
(2
On/Off EPG (Electronic Programme Guide)
Turn Teletext/MediaText on/off
Pressing briefly: Call function list for the active
operating mode
Pressing long: call System settings
Pressing briefly: step / level back
Pressing long: close all displays
Art 40-60
User guide
9
Remote control
(1
The assignment of these keys can be changed (see chapter External devices, section Operating Loewe units).
(2
The assignment of these keys can be changed (see chapter System settings, section Control – Web key function).
(3
Depending on the corresponding settings.
1
Sound mute/on
2
LED display for currently operated device
3
Switch to TV mode
4
Reassign remote control to SetTop-Box (PACE DS440N)
(1
5
DR+ archive on/off
6
Define active object as favourite
7
Electronic Programme Guide on/off
8
Teletext/MediaText
(3
on/off
9
Call function list
10
V+/V- Increase/reduce volume
11
Call station list / expanded station list
In the menu: confirm/call up
12
Green coloured key: screen on/off
13
Red coloured key: call preferred value-added network service
(3
14
Jump / wind
15
Direct recording (One Touch Recording)
16
Start / interrupt timeshift television
17
Finish timeshift
18
Jump / wind
19
Start / continue timeshift television
20
Blue coloured key: call station function list with subfunctions
21
Yellow coloured key: switching to previously received station
22
In menu / in lists: selecting/setting
23
P+/P– Select stations up/down
24
Press briefly: back to previous window (step back)
Press long: close all displays
25
Status display on/off
In menu: context-relevant Info on/ off
26
Open/close
Home
view
27
AV list
28
Select station directly
In the menu: Enter numbers or letters
29
Call MediaNet
(2
30
Reassign remote control to BluTech Vision 3D
(1
31
Switch to radio mode
(1
32
Switch ON/OFF to standby mode
System standby
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
32
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
17
The key assignment displayed here is valid for the main level of the TV set. The key assignment may vary in certain operating modes (see the cor-
responding chapter in this user guide).
Art 40-60
User guide
10
Functions of the operating elements
1
Mains switch:
The mains switch is located on the bottom of the set.
The TV set will be completely separated from mains only when
you unplug the mains cable.
2
On/Off key:
Switching on in standby mode
Switching off to the standby mode
3
IR receiver:
Infrared receiver for receiving the remote control commands.
4
Display:
white: TV set in standby
white, intermittent: TV set starts
green: TV set switched on
red: timer recording active
blue:
TV set in standby and background opera-
tion active (EPG data updating, software
update)
5
Infrared transmitter:
When showing 3D content, the 3D glasses Loewe Active
Glasses 3D are controlled via the infrared sensor.
6
Key M:
TV set in standby mode: switch TV set on in TV mode
TV set switched on: call direct control on TV set
in direct control on TV set: up
7
Key R:
TV set in standby mode: switch TV set on in radio mode
TV set switched on: toggle TV mode and radio mode
Direct control on TV set: down
8
Key +:
increase volume
Direct control on TV set: to the right
9
Key – :
reduce volume
Direct control on TV set: to the left
Operating controls on the TV set
M
R
+
-
4
1
8
9
2
3
7
6
5
Art 40-60
User guide
11
1
RS-232C - Serial interface
2
PC IN - Mini AV socket
(1
3
HDMI 1 - HDMI input 1 (with HDMI ARC support)
4
HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2
5
HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3
6
ANT TV - Antenna/cable analogue/digital
7
ANT SAT - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner)
8
SPDIF OUT - Digital audio output
9
USB - USB connection
10
LAN - Network connection
(2
11
CI-COMMON INTERFACE - Common Interface (CI slot)
12
- Headphone connection
13
HDMI 4 - HDMI input 4
14
AV - Mini AV socket
(1
15
USB - USB connection
16
USB - USB connection
17
Socket for Kensington lock
18
AC IN - Mains connection
Connections rear side of the device
(1
Adaptor set is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).
(2
Only use a LAN cable without a cap over the locking mechanism (see image
A
). LAN cables with caps may cause problems when the cable is being disconnected.
A
K
1 2
11
9
10
12
13
15
4 5 3
8
6 7
14
17
16
18
Art 40-60
User guide
12
Installing the TV set
Mounting options
Your Loewe specialist dealer can assist you in finding other mounting
options that correspond to your needs. Use exclusively Loewe mount-
ing options (e.g., wall bracket, floor stand), which you will find in the
chapter Accessories, section Mounting options.
After you have decided on a mounting option, follow the directions
found in the corresponding assembly instructions.
Installation notes
Choose a place for installing your TV set where no bright light or
sunlight shines directly onto the screen. This could cause reflections
which impair the picture.
3 times the screen diagonal can be taken as a guide value for the view-
ing distance (e.g., for a 46-inch set approx. 3.5 m for SD signal). The
viewing distance can be reduced with an HD signal.
Set covers
Covers for rear and side connections
In order to remove the rear side cable covers pull them simply from
the device.
To fit the cover, insert the lugs at the top edge of the cover into the
corresponding cut-outs in the rear panel and push up the cover until
it snaps in.
The side cover of the TV set can also be completely removed. For this,
open it as far as it will go and gently pull on the open cover.
The cover detaches from the holder and gives free access to the
connection area. To replace the cover, simply push it until it latches
back into place.
Connecting the TV set
Connecting to the mains supply
Remove the cover for the connections.
Connect the TV set to a 220-240V mains socket:
First plug the small plug of the power cable into the mains connection
on the back of the TV and then the large mains plug into a mains socket.
Connecting antennas
Cable (analogue) / DVB-C / DVB-T antenna:
Plug the cable of antenna, cable TV system or room antenna into the
ANT TV socket.
If you want to use analogue cables / DVB-C connection and a DVB-T
antenna together, use an external antenna switch (available from
your dealer).
Satellite antenna DVB-S:
Depending on the used satellite system, connect a connecting cable
from the multi-switch or directly from the LNC to the ANT-SAT socket
of the TV set respectively.
When connecting the TV set to a single cable community antenna,
connect the ANT-SAT socket directly to the appropriate SAT antenna
socket.
Ask your dealer in this regard.
R TV
Cable
analogue /
DVB-C
DVB-T DVB-S
Preparing the TV set
Art 40-60
User guide
13
Connecting the TV set to the Home network
You may link your TV set to the home network by a wired connection
(Ethernet, Powerline) or by a wireless radio connection (WLAN).
Please contact your specialist dealer for more information on Power-
line.
For the network adaptor configuration, see chapter System settings,
section Multimedia / Network– Network settings.
Under no circumstances may the TV set be wired and at the
same time connected by a wireless connection to the same
network, e.g. router. This may cause severe operational faults!
Example for a wired connection
Connect the LAN socket of your TV set to the LAN switch/router of
your home network with a network cable (available from your dealer).
Example for a wireless connection
You can connect the TV set to your home network by a wireless radio
connection via the WLAN antenna inside the set.
Shadowing effects caused by various materials, such as Reinforced
concrete, metal surfaces, etc., partly or entirely absorb the wireless
signal.
DSL
LAN switch/router
TV set
PC
DSL
WLAN router
TV set
PC
Preparing the TV set
Lay network cable to rear panel
Lay the network cable connected to the LAN socket on the TV set into
the appropriate deepening of the rear panel (see illustration). The
cover of the lateral connections can thus be closed as usual.
The network cable can then be bundled with the other cables of the
rear connections (see chapter prepare the TV set, section bundling
the cables).
Art 40-60
User guide
14
Bundling the cables
When installing the TV set with the mounting option Table Stand
(included in scope of delivery):
Thread the Velcro cable tie (K) through the holder of the Table Stand,
connect the cables to the TV set and secure them with the Velcro
cable tie. For more information, refer to the installation instructions
of the Table Stand.
Then fit the cover for the connections (see chapter Preparing the
TV set, section Set covers).
K
Preparing the remote control unit
Inserting or replacing batteries
Press on the embossed arrow whilst pushing the battery cover down.
Only use leak-proof micro-cells of the LR 03 (AAA) Alkali-Manganese
type. Do not use different types of batteries and old and new batter-
ies together.
The batteries used must not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunlight, fire or similar!
Pay attention to the correct polarity of + and – when inserting the
batteries.
If the batteries are too weak after longer use, the TV set prompts you
to change the batteries.
Dispose of used batteries in an environmentally friendly way (see
chapter Environment / Legal information).
Push the cover back on from below after having inserted the batteries.
Adjusting the remote control for operating the TV set
Press the TV key.
See in chapter External devices,section Operating
Loewe units how to operate other Loewe appliances
and how to re-programme the remote control keys.
Preparing the TV set
AAA LR03
AAA LR03
Art 40-60
User guide
15
Switching the TV set ON/OFF
Switching TV set to the standby mode
Press the mains switch at the bottom of the set.
The indicator in the control panel on the front side lights up white. The
set is now in standby mode.
Switching the TV on/off on the control unit
To switch the TV set into Operating mode or switch it off to Standby
mode, press the middle of the On/Off button for about 2 seconds.
Meaning of the colour of the LEDs in the On/Off button:
white: TV set in standby
white, intermittent: TV set starts
green: TV set switched on
red: Timer recording active
blue: TV set in standby and background opera-
tion active (EPG data updating, software
update, DR+ streaming server function)
After switching on the TV set, it takes a few seconds for further
operating commands to be processed (Exception: Quick start
mode, see chapter System settings, section Control – Quick
start mode). Your TV set is ready to operate as soon as the status
indicator in the control panel lights up in green.
Mains switch
Control unit
M
R
+
-
Display
Switching the TV set on by means of the remote control
Press the on/off key.
Or:
Press the TV key.
The previously watched station will be called.
Or:
Press numerical keys 1-9.
The corresponding station will be called.
After switching on the TV set, it takes a few seconds for further
operating commands to be processed (Exception: Quick start
mode, see chapter System settings, section Control – Quick
start mode). Your TV set is ready to operate as soon as the status
indicator in the control panel lights up in green.
Switching the set off with the remote control (Standby)
Press the on/off key.
Before switching off the set with the mains switch,
we recommend you to switch it to standby mode.
Switching off the TV set and connected additional devices
(System standby)
Press on/off key long:
Switch TV set and all CEC-capable devices connected
to the HDMI interfaces OFF to Standby mode (System
Standby).
Technical information
Switching off the TV set with the mains switch during operation or an
inadvertent disruption to the power supply (e.g., power failure) can
cause damage to the USB hard disk file system and hence loss of the
recorded broadcasts. Always return the TV set to Standby mode
before switching it off with the main switch.
However, if unexpected problems occur when operating the hard disk,
formatting the hard disk may rectify this. You can find the correspon
-
ding menu items under System settings ט Control ט more .... ט
Hard disks.
Loewe is not liable for data being lost from USB hard disks.
Switching the TV set ON/OFF
Art 40-60
User guide
16
General information on menu operation
General information on menu operation
Some keys of the remote control for operating the TV set you will use
more often than others. The most important keys for navigation will
be explained in general. The numbers in the text refer to the figure
showing the remote control in chapter Remote control.
The arrow keys
22
help you to navigate in the menus and lists of the
TV set and for selecting menu items. They are arranged in the middle
of the remote control in a circle around the OK key
11
. Later in this
quick guide they will be represented as follows:
 Select the desired item.
The OK key
11
is used to confirm a selection, for calling the highlighted
menu item and for opening the station list. In this quick guide, an
instruction for this key looks like the following:
OKconfirm.
Using the numerical keys of your remote control
28
you enter pro-
gramme channels and teletext pages directly. With key 0 you open
the AV list. In this user guide, entering numbers with numerical keys
is shown as follows:
Entering programme channel directly.
The numerical keys are also used to enter text (see chapter General
information on menu operation,section Entry of characters by
remote control).
The Home view is the central overview page for all of your TV set‘s
operating modes. You reach Home view with the HOME key
26
.
HOME: Call Home view.
Pressing the BACK key
24
briefly brings you one level up in the wizard.
Pressing the BACK key longer closes all opened fade-ins. An example
for the BACK key in this quick guide:
BACK: Stop text entry and exit entry box.
Prolonged pressure on the INFO key
25
shows a key guide window that
gives you information on the currently most important key functions.
If the function for a key is not available, this will be indicated by an
inserted symbol
on the right above.
Structure of the Menu screen
Basically, the structure of the different menu screens is similar, de-
pending on the fact if a wizard, rendering media content or a setup
menu are concerned. The structure is explained by means of three
different screens.
The functions of these menu screens are explained more detailed in
the respective chapters.
Screen structure: Wizard
(A) Title bar with name of the wizard and the current operating step.
(B) Selected items, whose number can be different according to the
operating step.
(C) Bottom line showing the available operating controls. If required,
instructions and information are inserted.
Screen structure: Rendering of media content (example:
Audio player)
(A) Title bar with selected album / subdirectory.
(B) Menu item Back to exit the menu or to go back to the previous
menu item.
(C) Selection of album or title
(D) Time bar
(E) Bottom line with the different symbols for controlling the playback
function.
A
C
B
INITIAL INSTALLATION - Menu language
Proceed withBack with
Which menu language do you want to use for operation?
Deutsch (de) Ελληνικά (el) Svenska (sv)
English (en) Polski (pl) Dansk (da)
Français (fr) Magyar (hu) Português (pt)
Italiano (it) Suomi (fi) Русский (ru)
Español (es) Slovenščina (sl) Norsk (no)
Nederlands (nl) Slovenčina (sk) ₼㠖 (zh)
Čeština (cs) Türkçe (tr)
Chasing Cars Shut Your EyesHands Open
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
00:00
02:56
04:27
A
C
B
D
E
Back
Art 40-60
User guide
17
General information on menu operation
Screen structure: Setup (example: picture)
(A) Selected function in the Home overview (here: system settings)
(B) Home Menu System settings, with selected menu item Picture.
(C) Menu items Picture focusing on 3D
(D) Help text for the selected menu item Picture > 3D
Navigation: Selection of elements (example: On-screen displays)
Highlighting and thus selecting the symbols/elements or menu items
on the screen can be effected by the arrow keys on the remote control.
So you can see all the time where you are. As soon as there is a bar
above a symbol or text, this is a selected element.
(A) Selectable elements / menu items.
(B) The text in the line where the marker is currently located is white.
(C) Move the selection marking by means of the arrow keys 
to the menu item to be set.
The position of the marking is easy to see by the blue line.
In most cases, the marked menu item will be automatically
adopted. The font colour of the previously active item will change
to grey, that of the newly selected item to white.
In a few menus, to confirm a selected menu item is required by
pressing OK.
A
CB D
Picture
3D
Picture ad-
justment
Contrast
Brightness
Colour in-
tensity
Image+
Active
Picture for-
mat
more ...
If your desired display format has not been automatically
selected then you can choose it in the 3D settings menu.
You may display the 3D image in 2D or vice versa.
......
On-screen
displays
Display time
Volume display
Automatic menu info
Key explanation
Permanent clock display
Automatic HDMI hint
On-screen displays
If you select "on" here, the informational text belonging to each selected menu item will always appear
simultaneously.
Back
< 7s >
off on
off on
off on
off on
off on
< 7s >
off on
on
off on
off on
on
A
B
C
Navigation: Wizards
If the menu item(s) (marked white) is/are already
correctly preset:
Go to next step.
Otherwise:
Mark the menu items to be changed. The
update will be adopted automatically. The
fount colour of the previously active item will
change to grey. If not,
OK confirm the selection.
Go to next step.
Navigation: Element selection in lists using initials
Using the numerical keys of the remote control you can jump into list,
e.g., Internet radio station lists.
If the list is sorted in alphabetical order, you jump to the entered letter.
For example, when pressing the key 7 three times you jump to the first
list element starting with letter R.
In case of numerical sorting, you can directly select the stations with
the numerical keys.
Please specify whether you want to search for scrambled stations too.
Note: Scrambled stations can only be received with an integrated CA module and
additional card.
Scrambled stations
Search method
Symbol rate
Accept Logical Channel Number
DVB-S settings (ASTRA1 19,2°E)
Back with Proceed with
no
yes
Network search
Frequency search
22000
no
yes
Art 40-60
User guide
18
General information on menu operation
Entering characters with on-screen keyboard
For certain functions, entering letters or characters is required, e.g., for
Web addresses (URLs) in the browser or for renaming archive entries.
An on-screen keyboard appears for entering text.
highlight character / on-screen button,
OK Adopt character.
In the event of letters with a triangular, additional
letters are displayed when pressing the OK button
longer (2 sec).
For the selection of special characters use the .-/
field.
To conclude the entry:
 Mark Adopt,
OK confirm the selection.
Entry of characters by remote control
Alternatively to the on-screen keyboard you can also enter the desired
characters by means of the remote control (as with the keypad of a
mobile phone).
 Mark text entry field.
Under the 1st letter of the name you will see a line
indicating the current input position.
Input position one character to the right (also for
blanks).
Input position one character to the left.
Input the letters one after another. When using the
remote control, press the numerical keys just as on
a mobile phone keypad (0-9) until the desired symbol
is displayed. The available letters are printed on the
individual numeric buttons.
You find the exact key assignment in the character
table in the right column.
To conclude the entry:
 Mark Adopt,
OK confirm the selection.
q
a
y
1
w
s
x
2
e
d
c
3
r
f
v
4
t
g
b
5
z
h
n
6
u
j
m
7
i
k
.-/
8
o
l
9
P
I
0
ABC
http://www.loewe.de
.com .net . /.dewww.
Enter/change internet address
Back
Adopt Cancel
Delete Cancel AdoptSpace
(2 sec) on a letter with a triangle shows more letters
OK
Table of characters for entering text by means of the remote
control
Key Characters (uppercase - lowercase)
1
[space] 1
2
A B C 2 Ä Æ Ã Å Ā À Á Ć Ç Č - a b c 2 ä æ ã å ā â à á ć ç č
3
D E F 3 Ė Ë Ē Ę Ê È É - d e f 3 ė ë ē ę ê è é
4
G H I 4 Ï Ī Į Î Ì Í - g h i 4 ï ī į î î ì í
5
J K L 5 - j k l 5
6
M N O 6 Ö O E Õ Ō Ô Ò Ó Ø - m n o 6 ń ñ ö o e õ ō ô ò ó ø
7
P Q R S 7 ß - p q r s 7 ß
8
T U V 8 Ü Ū Û Ù Ú - t u v 8 ü ū û ù ú
9
W X Y Z 9 - w x y z 9
0
. 0 - / _ : + , ; ? ! = & # % ~ @ $ * ( ) § \ { } [ ] < > ´ ` ^ |
Art 40-60
User guide
19
General information on menu operation
Operation without remote control
Changing Volume
+ / – Increase/reduce volume.
Switching radio on or off or switching to radio
R Radio on or switch between TV and Radio.
Calling direct control on TV set
M Call direct control on TV set.
R Scroll down.
M Scroll up.
Scroll left.
+ Scroll right, adopt settings, confirm.
Close all displays
Press M longer.
Explanations of the settings:
Operating
mode
Switch between TV and radio operation.
Station
selection
Call Station selection.
AV selection Select AV interface.
3D Calling 3D settings.
Contrast Set contrast.
The power consumption of the TV set depends
directly on the value set here.
Picture
format
Selecting the picture format.
Service
The Service menu item is provided for service
purposes by dealers only.
Operating
mode
Station selec-
tion
AV selection
3D
Contrast
Picture for-
mat
Service
Info display
The info display provides an info text appropriate to the on-screen
display that can assist you further with the operation of your TV set.
An on-screen display is faded in.
The factory setting is that the info display is shown
automatically for each menu item. In this case you can
temporarily hide the info texts with the INFO key.
The automatic info display can be hidden via a menu
setting. Then it can be displayed temporarily by press-
ing the INFO key.
Permanently display or hide the automatic info display
Once you have become familiar with how to operate the TV set, you
can switch off the automatic info display.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call system settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark more ...,
move to next column.
 Mark On-screen displays,
call on-screen display settings.
 Select Automatic menu info,
select on / off.
OK adopt settings.
...
Energy effi-
ciency
Home Mode
Premium
Mode
Shop Mode
The priority here is low energy consumption in home use. In this
case, the TV switches off automatically for the sake of saving
energy, after it has been out of operation for four hours.
......
On-screen
displays
Display time
Volume display
Automatic menu info
Key explanation
Permanent clock display
Automatic HDMI hint
On-screen displays
If you select "on" here, the informational text belonging to each selected menu item will always appear
simultaneously.
Back
< 7s >
off on
off on
off on
off on
off on
< 7s >
off on
on
off on
off on
on
Art 40-60
User guide
20
Initial installation
Initial installation wizard
Initial installation after switching on for the first time
The Initial installation wizard starts automatically with an initial instal-
lation. It may be called repeatedly again (see chapter Extras ,section
Special functions – Repeat initial installation).
If at least one station is locked, the access code must be entered
before repeating initial installation (see chapter System settings,
section Control – Parental lock).
For information on navigation within the wizard refer to chapter
General information on menu operation.
First installation wizard routine
The selected settings affect the routine of the Initial installation wizard.
 Select desired Menu language.
Selecting the language of the user guidance is the
wizard’s first step. Then you simply follow the instruc-
tions on your TV screen.
Proceed to next step.
 Select Energy efficiency.
Determine how energy efficient your TV set shall
be. The value for the contrast (and thus the bright-
ness of the background lighting) is adapted and
the automatic dimmer activated or deactivated
depending on the presetting.
Choosing Home mode automatically activates
shutdown. For Premium mode or Shop mode,
automatic shutdown is initially deactivated.
See chapter For your safety for further informa-
tion on automatic shutdown.
Deutsch (de) ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ (el) Svenska (sv)
English (en) Polski (pl) Dansk (da)
Français (fr) Magyar (hu) Português (pt)
Italiano (it) Suomi (fi) ȇɭɫɫɤɢɣ (ru)
Español (es) Slovenščina (sl) Norsk (no)
Nederlands (nl) Slovenčina (sk) (zh)
Čeština (cs) Türkçe (tr)
INITIAL INSTALLATION - Menu language
Proceed with
Which menu language do you want to use for operation?
Menu
language
Here you define how energy efficiently you operate your TV. With the "Home Mode"
setting you put the focus on low energy consumption for home use. The "Premium Mode"
is optimised to a brighter environment with a higher energy consumption. The "Shop
Mode" is designed for operation in a showroom.
Note: If you select "Home Mode" here, the TV set will automatically switch off to save
energy after no longer being operated for 4 hours.
Energy efficiency
Back with Proceed with
Home mode Premium mode Shop mode
Energy
efficiency
Home mode:
The emphasis for home use is on low energy consump-
tion. The automatic dimmer is activated.
Premium mode:
This mode optimises the settings to a brighter environ-
ment at a higher energy consumption. The automatic
dimmer is activated.
The use of this energy efficiency setting must be con-
firmed afterwards once again.
Shop mode:
The picture settings are aligned to operation in the
presentation room. The automatic dimmer is deacti-
vated. If the ambient brightness diminishes, the energy
consumption is not reduced.
The use of this energy efficiency setting must be con-
firmed afterwards once again.
The presetting can be changed later in Extras ט
Energy efficiency or in the System settings under
Pictureט Picture adjustment.
Proceed to next step.
Select the Operating mode.
Use the TV set as a TV set:
Continued with Location of TV set (see below).
Use the TV set just as a monitor:
see chapter Initial installation, section TV set as a
monitor.
 Select Location of TV set (national defaults
are adopted).
For certain locations (e.g., Australia), there
is finally a selection screen where you can
indicate in which state/territory the device
is being operated.
Proceed to next step.
Energy
efficiency
(continued)
Operating
mode
Please specify if you wish to use the full TV function of your set, or if you wish to use it
purely as a monitor.
Operating mode
As TV set As monitor only
Back with Proceed with
Please specify the location of your TV set so that the available stations can be sorted
according to the specify country.
Location of TV set
Back with Proceed with
(DK) Denmark
(E) Spain
(F) France
(FIN) Finland
(H) Hungary
(I) Italy
(IRL) Ireland
(L) Luxembourg
(N) Norway
(NL) Netherlands
(NZ) New Zealand
(P) Portugal
(PL) Poland
(RUS) Russia
(S) Sweden
(SK) Slovakia
(SLO) Slovenia
(TR) Turkey
(UK) United Kingdom
Other country
Location of
TV set
Art 40-60
User guide
21
Initial installation
Select antenna cable.
OK Connect/disconnect antenna cable.
Ahead of each selected antenna, the symbol
appears.
Cable analog: analogue stations via cable
Terrestrial (DVB-T): digital stations via antenna
Cable (DVB-C): digital stations via cable
Satellite (DVB-S): digital stations via satellite
Proceed to next step.
 Considering the plugged CA module(s) specify
which stations should be searched automatically.
If the CA module(s) do(es) not support this func-
tion or if no CA module is plugged in, this step will
be skipped.
Proceed to next step.
Depending on the antennas (analogue cable, DVB-T,
DVB-C, DVB-S) selected, the appropriate settings
appear below.
Linea/e antenna per: alla presa/e antenna:
Cavo analogico ANT TV
Terrestre (DVB-T) ANT TV
Cavo (DVB-C) ANT TV
Satellite (DVB-S) ANT SAT
Antenna cable(s) for: to antenna socket(s):
Cable analog ANT TV
Terrestrial (DVB-T) ANT TV
Cable (DVB-C) ANT TV
Satellite (DVB-S) ANT SAT
Your television will automatically search for stations. With , highlight which antenna
cables are available for your TV set and connect them to the correct antenna sockets,
which are specified here in the right-hand column.
Connect antenna cable(s)
Back with Proceed with
OK
Selecting
antennas
The CA module "name module" provides a special station list "name list".
Taking this into consideration, specify which stations are to be searched
automatically and mark at least one of the two items below with .
All receivable stations excluding stations in the special station list
Stations in the special station list "name list"
Extent of station search
OK
Back with Proceed with
Extent of
station search
Setting options for reception via analogue cable:
If you have not selected Cable analog in the list of available antennas:
Proceed to Setting options for DVB-T reception.
The selection of a Colour standard is only required
when the Location of TV set Other country was
selected. Otherwise, the country-specific default
settings will be preset when selecting the Location
of TV set. This step will be skipped then
 Select appropriate colour standard.
Proceed to next step.
Depending on the antennas (analogue cable, DVB-T,
DVB-C, DVB-S) selected, the appropriate settings
appear below.
Please select the TV/colour standard.
Automatic BG+L SECAM-BG
PAL-BG SECAM-DK
PAL-DK SECAM-L
PAL-I NTSC
TV/col. standard
Back with Proceed with
TV/col.
standard
Art 40-60
User guide
22
Initial installation
Setting options for DVB-T reception:
If you have not selected DVB-T antenna in the list of available antennas:
Proceed to Setting options for DVB-C reception.
If a CA module is plugged in during Initial installation and if the
item Station of the special station list was selected in Extent
of station search, the routine continues with the step Supply
voltage (see right column).
If several networks are available via DVB-T, you can
decide which network you want to receive your chan-
nels from.
Select network,
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
 Select and adapt settings for DVB-T reception.
Network
selection
Please state from which network you wish to receive your station.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the button.
Freeview
other network
Network selection (DVB-T)
Back with Proceed with
OK
Please specify whether you want to search for scrambled stations too.
Note: Scrambled stations can only be received with an integrated CA module and
additional card.
DVB-T settings
Search method
Accept Logical Channel Number
Scrambled stations no yes
Channel search Frequency search
no yes
Back with Proceed with
Settings
Scrambled
stations
You can state whether coded stations are to be
searched for in the search/update.
Select yes to
save all found scrambled stations. However, these
stations can only be received in connection with a CA
module and the appropriate Smart Card.
Handling
of the CA module is described in chapter Extras,
section CA module.
Search
method
If you want to run the station search independently
of the channel grid, select Frequency search for
the search method.
Accept
Logical
Channel
Number
In various countries, digital stations (DVB-T) are
transmitted with a preset channel number per
station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).
If you select yes here, these default channel slots
will be used and the channels of the preferred signal
source will be sorted as per LCN. The stations in the
station list can no longer be shifted.
Proceed to next step.
 Select supply voltage no / yes.
If you use a DVB-T antenna that requires a supply
voltage (active antenna) and which is not already
supplied via a power adaptor, then select yes (5V)
for the antenna’s power supply.
How to align your DVB-T antenna is described in
chapter System settings, section Connections
Antenna DVB.
Proceed to next step.
Please state here whether your DVB-T antenna needs a supply voltage. Antennas with an
integrated amplifier need a supply voltage on the antenna line.
Supply voltage DVB-T antenna
no (0V) yes (5V)
Back with Proceed with
Supply
voltage
Art 40-60
User guide
23
Initial installation
Setting options for DVB-C reception:
If you have not selected DVB-C antenna in the list of available antennas:
Proceed to Setting options for DVB-S reception.
If a CA module is plugged in during Initial installation and if the item
Stations in the special station list was selected in Extent of
station search, the station list of the CA module will be adopted.
Further settings described on this page will then be skipped. The
procedure of the initial installation will then be continued with the
step Setting options for DVB-S reception.
If several networks are available via DVB-C, you can
decide which network you want to receive your chan-
nels from. The normal DVB-C settings are derived from
the selection of the location or network and do not
need to be changed. Exactly which of the following
settings are present is dependent on which network is
selected.
 Select network.
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
 Select and adapt settings for DVB-C recep-
tion.
Network
selection
Please state from which network you wish to receive your station.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the button.
Unitymedia
Standard
Network selection (DVB-C)
Back with Proceed with
OK
Please specify whether you want to search for scrambled stations too.
Note: Scrambled stations can only be received with an integrated CA module and additional
card.
DVB-C settings
Scrambled stations
Search method
Start frequency
Network ID
Accept Logical Channel Number
no yes
Network search Frequency search
044.00 MHz
none 00000
no yes
Back with Proceed with
Settings
Scrambled
stations
You can state whether coded stations are to be
searched for in the search/update.
Select yes to
save all found scrambled stations. However, these
stations can only be received in connection with a CA
module and the appropriate Smart Card.
Handling
of the CA module is described in chapter Extras,
section CA module.
Search
method
If you select Frequency search here, a search is
performed for all receivable stations. With Network
search, only the stations which the networks supply
are searched - either for all receivable networks
or only for the particular network specified under
Network ID.
Start
frequency
The DVB stations are only searched for in the fre-
quency range above the start frequency.
Network ID
If you select none here, DVB signals of all current
transmitter networks are searched automatically
(recommended for most cable networks).
If, on the other hand, you specify a certain network ID
(necessary in the cable networks of some countries),
only DVB signals of this broadcasting network are
searched for automatically.
Your cable provider has the information you need.
Accept
Logical
Channel
Number
In various countries, digital stations (DVB-C) are
transmitted with a preset channel number per
station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).
If you select yes here, these default channel slots
will be used and the channels of the preferred signal
source will be sorted as per LCN. The stations in the
station list can no longer be shifted.
Proceed to next step.
Art 40-60
User guide
24
Initial installation
Setting options for DVB-S reception:
If you have not selected DVB-S antenna in the list of available anten-
nas: Proceed to Setting options for all types of reception.
 Select network.
If several networks are available via DVB-S, you can
decide which network you want to receive your
channels from.
Proceed to next step.
 Selecting the satellite system.
Specify how you receive which satellite(s) (single
satellite or type of satellite system). Ask your
dealer in this regard.
The normal DVB-S settings are derived from the
selection of the location and do not need to be
changed in most cases.
Network
selection
Please state from which network you wish to receive your station.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the button.
ASTRA LCN
Standard
Network selection
Back with Proceed with
OK
Please define which satellites you receive or which satellite equipment you use.
Select satellite installation
Indietro con Avanti con
Single satellite
2 satellites on 22 kHz switchbox
2 satellites on toneburst switch
Max. 4 satellites on DiSEqC multiswitch
DiSEqC one cable communal system
Other communal installation
Select
satellite
installation
Single
satellite
Reception of a single satellite via a connected LNC
(LNB).
2 satellites
on 22 kHz
switchbox
Reception of two different satellites with two LNCs
(LNBs) which are connected to the TV set by a 22
kHz switchbox.
2 satellites
on toneburst
switch
Reception of two different satellites with two LNCs
(LNBs) which are connected to the TV set by a
toneburst switch.
Max. 4
satellites
on DiSEqC
multiswitch
The TV set controls a DiSEqC multiswitch to which
up to four LNCs (LNBs) for different satellites are
connected.
DiSEqC
one cable
communal
system
Select setting if the TV set is connected to a DiSEqC
single-cable system (according to EN 50494). Several
Sat receivers can be connected to one Sat cable.
other
communal
installation
Select setting if the TV set is connected to a single-
cable system (without DiSEqC). Several Sat recei-
vers can be connected to one Sat cable. Contrary
to a DiSEqC one cable communal system there are
restrictions in the range of certain reception frequen-
cies in "common" single-cable community systems.
Proceed to next step (to the appropriate page of
the satellite system).
Art 40-60
User guide
25
Initial installation
Setting options for the satellite system (single satellite):
 Select satellite,
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
 Select Dual band (low/high) or Single band.
Here you specify if you use a Dual Band (Univer-
sal) LNB or a Single LNB.
Proceed to next step.
 Set LNB frequencies.
OK Adopt settings.
The setting of the LNB frequency is only called
when you have used the setting Single band
in step Dual / single band.
Normally, you do not need to change the values
for high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of
your satellite system uses a different oscillator
frequency (important for the frequency display).
Proceed to next step.
Proceed with Setting options for DVB-S reception
(continued).
Optus D1160°E
Türksat 42°E
Hellas Sat2 39°E
Eutelsat 36A 36°E
Eutelsat 28A 28,5°E
ASTRA2 28,2°E
ASTRA3 23,5°E
Eutelsat 5 West A 5°W
Nilesat 7°W
Eutelsat 7 West A 7,2°W
Eutelsat 8 West A 8°W
Eutelsat 12 West A 12,5°W
Telestart12 12,5°W
Intelsat901 18°W
ASTRA1 19,2°E
Eutelsat 16A 16°E
Hot Bird 13°E
Eurobird 9A 9°E
Eurobird 7A 7°E
ASTRA4A 4,8°E
Thor/Intelsat10-02 0,8
Select satellites
Please specify here which satellite you receive.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the button.
Back with Proceed with
OK
Select
single satellite
Here, please specify whether you are using a Dual Band (Universal) LNB or a Single Band
LNB.
Dual/single band (ASTRA1 19,2°E)
Dual band (low/high) Single band
Back with Proceed with
Dual/single
band
Please specify the oscillator frequency for your LNB.
LNB frequencies
ASTRA1 19,2°E low Band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz
Back with Proceed with
LNC
frequencies
Setting options for the satellite system (2 satellites on 22
kHz switchbox / 2 satellites on toneburst switch):
 Mark Satellite 1 / Satellite 2,
 select satellite.
OK Adopt settings.
Proceed to next step.
 Set LNB frequencies.
OK Adopt settings.
Normally, you do not need to change the values
unless the LNC (LNB) of your satellite system
uses a different oscillator frequency (important
for the frequency display).
Proceed to next step.
Proceed with Setting options for DVB-S reception
(continued).
Thor/Intelsat10-02 0,8
Eutelsat 5 West A 5°W
Nilesat 7°W
Eutelsat 7 West A 7,2°W
Eutelsat 8 West A 8°W
Eutelsat 12 West A 12,5°W
Telestart12 12,5°W
ASTRA3 23,5°E
ASTRA1 19,2°E
Eutelsat 16A 16°E
Hot Bird 13°E
Eurobird 9A 9°E
Eurobird 7A 7°E
ASTRA4A 4,8°E
Select satellites
Please select satellite 1 and satellite 2.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the button.
Back with Proceed with
OK
none
Optus D1160°E
Türksat 42°E
Hellas Sat2 39°E
Eutelsat 36A 36°E
Eutelsat 28A 28,5°E
ASTRA2 28,2°E
Satellit 1 Satellit 2
Satellite
selection
Please select the LNB frequency for the Low Band. High band frequency is autom. adjusted.
Note: The newly selected parameter in each case must be confirmed with the button.
ASTRA1 19,2°E Low Band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E Low Band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz
LNB frequencies
OK
Back with Proceed with
LNB frequencies
Please select the LNB frequencies for High and Low Bands.
Note: The newly selected parameter in each case must be confirmed with the button.
ASTRA1 19,2°E low band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz
ASTRA1 19,2°E high band 10600 MHz 10750 MHz 11000 MHz 11250 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E low band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E high band 10600 MHz 10750 MHz 11000 MHz 11250 MHz
OK
Back with Proceed with
LNC
frequency
(22 kHz
Switch box)
LNC
frequencies
(Toneburst
switch)
Art 40-60
User guide
26
Initial installation
Setting options for the satellite system
(max. 4 satellites on DiSEqC multiswitch):
 Select and adapt settings for the DiSEqC
multiswitch.
OK Adopt settings.
Repeat rate
The refresh rate determines how often a DiSEqC
command is output. A refresh is only necessary with
cascaded systems.
Control
voltage
The control voltage controls the switching of the
polarisation level (horizontal/vertical) in non-DiSEqC
capable components (e.g., control of single LNBs via
DiSEqC multiswitch).
22kHz signal
The 22 kHz signal controls the switching between
high and low band in the Band setting. The Position
setting controls the selection of the satellites in non-
DiSEqC capable components.
Toneburst
The Toneburst controls the selection of the satellites
in non-DiSEqC but Toneburst capable components
with the Position and Option settings.
Proceed to next step.
 Mark Satellite 1 ... Satellite 4,
 Select satellite.
OK Adopt settings.
Proceed to next step.
With the refresh rate you determine how often a DiSEqC command is output. This is only
necessary in a cascaded system. Your system provider will bei able to tell you more about
this.
Settings DiSEqC multiple switch
Back with Proceed with
Repeat rate none 1 2
Control voltage 13 / 18V off on
22kHz signal Band Position off
Toneburst off Position Option
DiSEqC
multiple
switch
Thor/Intelsat10-02 0,8
Eutelsat 5 West A 5°W
Nilesat 7°W
Eutelsat 7 West A 7,2°W
Eutelsat 8 West A 8°W
Eutelsat 12 West A 12,5°W
Telestart12 12,5°W
ASTRA3 23,5°E
ASTRA1 19,2°E
Eutelsat 16A 16°E
Hot Bird 13°E
Eurobird 9A 9°E
Eurobird 7A 7°E
ASTRA4A 4,8°E
Select satellites
Please select satellite 1 to satellite 4.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the button.
Back with Proceed with
OK
none
Optus D1160°E
Türksat 42°E
Hellas Sat2 39°E
Eutelsat 36A 36°E
Eutelsat 28A 28,5°E
ASTRA2 28,2°E
Satellit 1 Satellit 2 Satellit 3 Satellit 4
Satellite
selection
.
 Set LNB frequencies.
Normally, you do not need to change the values.
OK Adopt settings.
Proceed to next step.
Proceed with Setting options for DVB-S reception
(continued).
LNB frequencies
Please select the LNB frequencies for both High and Low Bands.
Note: The newly selected parameter in each case must be confirmed with the button.
ASTRA1 19,2°E low band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz
ASTRA1 19,2°E high band 10600 MHz 10750 MHz 11000 MHz 11250 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E low band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E high band 10600 MHz 10750 MHz 11000 MHz 11250 MHz
Eutelsat W2 16°E low band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz
Eutelsat W2 16°E high band 10600 MHz 10750 MHz 11000 MHz 11250 MHz
Türksat 42°E low band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz
Türksat 42°E high band 10600 MHz 10750 MHz 11000 MHz 11250 MHz
OK
Back with Proceed with
LNC
frequencies
Art 40-60
User guide
27
Initial installation
Setting options for the satellite system
(DiSEqC one cable communal system):
 Select One channel or Two channels.
Here you specify if you use one or two transmis-
sion channels in your one cable communal
system.
In case of two channels - as far as they are avail-
able in your system - different stations can be
simultaneously viewed on the main picture and
on PIP.
You get more information on your system from
your dealer.
Proceed to next step.
Select DiSEqC single cable communal instal-
lation.
Proceed to next step.
 Select satellites from list,
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
Number of
system
channel used
Number of system channel used
One channel Two channels
Do you wish to use one or two transmission channels in your single cable communal
installation? With two channels - provided they are available to you from the installation - it
is possible to watch different stations at the same time in the main screen and in the PIP.
Retour avec Continuer avec
Select DiSEqC single cable communal installation
Please enter here which DiSEqC single cable system you are using. The following setting
parameters of your system are then adapted accordingly.
User defined DELTA SUM-918 KATHREIN EXR-501
DELTA SUM-514 DELTA SUM-928 KATHREIN EXR-551
DELTA SUM-516 DELTA MSU-50x KATHREIN EXR-552
DELTA SUM-518 DELTA MSU-90x/170x KATHREIN EXR-154
Back with Proceed with
DiSEqC
one cable
communal
installation
Thor/Intelsat10-02 0,8
Eutelsat 5 West A 5°W
Nilesat 7°W
Eutelsat 7 West A 7,2°W
Eutelsat 8 West A 8°W
Eutelsat 12 West A 12,5°W
Telestart12 12,5°W
ASTRA3 23,5°E
ASTRA1 19,2°E
Eutelsat 16A 16°E
Hot Bird 13°E
Eurobird 9A 9°E
Eurobird 7A 7°E
ASTRA4A 4,8°E
Select satellites
Please specify here which satellite you receive.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the button.
Back with Proceed with
none
Optus D1160°E
Türksat 42°E
Hellas Sat2 39°E
Eutelsat 36A 36°E
Eutelsat 28A 28,5°E
ASTRA2 28,2°E
OK
Satellite
selection
.
 Set LNB frequencies.
Normally, you do not need to change the
values unless the LNC (LNB) of your satellite
system uses a different oscillator frequency
(important for the frequency display).
OK Adopt settings.
Proceed to next step.
 Select and adjust settings for the DiSEqC
single cable communal installation.
OK Adopt settings.
Transmission
channel
Select the desired transmission channel.
Transmission
frequency
Select the corresponding transmission frequency.
PIN protection
If your system is designed for it, it is possible to pro-
tect your used transmission data from use by other
subscribers with a PIN.
Define/
change PIN
Here you can determine and change the PIN for
PIN protection. Only possible, when yes has been
selected for PIN protection.
Proceed to next step.
Proceed with Setting options for DVB-S reception
(continued).
Please specify the oscillator frequency for the Low Band. High band frequency is auotm. adjusted
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the button.
LNB frequencies
ASTRA1 19,2°E low Band 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz
ASTRA1 19,2°E high Band 10600 MHz 10750 MHz 11000 MHz 11250 MHz
Back with Proceed with
OK
LNB
frequencies
Please log on to your DiSEqC single-cable system that is connected to the antenna input
ANT SAT and specify the desired transmission channel and associated transmission
frequency. Please also indicate whether your single-cable system has a broad frequency
band instead of a division into high and low band. If your antenna system is designed for
this, it is possible to protect your used transmission data from being used by other
participants by having a PIN.
Note: The newly selected parameter in each case must be confirmed with the button.
Transmission channel 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Transmission frequency
1284 MHz 1400 MHz 1516 MHz 1632 MHz 1748 MHz
PIN protection Ja
Nein
Define/change PIN 000
Manual registration (for socket ANT SAT)
OK
Back with Proceed with
Manual
registration
(for socket
ANT SAT)
Art 40-60
User guide
28
Initial installation
Setting options for the satellite system (other communal
installation):
 Select satellite.
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
 Select and adapt settings.
LNC
frequency
Normally, you do not need to change the values for
high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of your
satellite system uses a different oscillator frequency
(important for the frequency display).
Supply
voltage
If your set is connected to a single-cable system
without external voltage supply, you can connect
the antenna supply (13V or 18V / max. 500mA).
Proceed to next step.
Continue with Setting options for all types of
reception.
Optus D1160°E
Türksat 42°E
Hellas Sat2 39°E
Eutelsat 36A 36°E
Eutelsat 28A 28,5°E
ASTRA2 28,2°E
ASTRA3 23,5°E
Eutelsat 5 West A 5°W
Nilesat 7°W
Eutelsat 7 West A 7,2°W
Eutelsat 8 West A 8°W
Eutelsat 12 West A 12,5°W
Telestart12 12,5°W
Intelsat901 18°W
ASTRA1 19,2°E
Eutelsat 16A 16°E
Hot Bird 13°E
Eurobird 9A 9°E
Eurobird 7A 7°E
ASTRA4A 4,8°E
Thor/Intelsat10-02 0,8
Select satellites
Please specify here which satellite you receive.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the button.
Back with Proceed with
OK
Select
single satellite
LNB frequency, supply voltage
ASTRA1 19,2°E 9750 MHz 10000 MHz 10200 MHz 10600 MHz
Supply voltage off 13V 18V
Please specify the oscillator frequency for your LNB.
If your TV set is connected to a single cable system without an external power supply, you
can connect the antenna supply (13 or 18V/max. 350mA) with „13V“ or „18V“.
Back with Proceed with
LNB
frequencies
Art 40-60
User guide
29
Initial installation
Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued):
After you have made the previous settings, you should
receive picture and sound of the selected satellites
(only possible for Astra1 and HOTBIRD).
Proceed to next step.
 Select and adapt settings.
If several satellites are received, the following settings
must be made for every satellite. The type of settings
available may differ depending on the selected satellite
or network.
Scrambled
stations
You can state whether coded stations are to be
searched for in the search/update.
Select yes to
save all found scrambled stations. However, these
stations can only be received in connection with a CA
module and the appropriate Smart Card.
Handling
of the CA module is described in chapter Extras,
section CA module.
Search
method
If you select Frequency search here, a search is
performed for all receivable stations. With Network
search, from all receivable networks all the stations
are searched which are supplied by these networks.
Depending on the selected network, this step
might possibly be skipped.
Symbol rate
The symbol rate is specified by the satellite provider
and normally does not need to be changed.
Accept
Logical
Channel
Number
In various countries, digital stations (DVB-S) are
transmitted with a preset channel number per
station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).
If you select yes here, these default channel slots
will be used and the channels of the preferred signal
source will be sorted as per LCN. The stations in the
station list can no longer be shifted.
Proceed to next step.
Continue with Setting options for all types of
reception.
Test reception
You should now receive a picture and sound from the following satellite:
Astra1 19,2°E C/N Level
Otherwise, please adjust your antenna. If it is already correctly adjusted, please continue all
the same, without receiving picture or sound for the moment.
Back with Proceed with
Settings
Please specify whether you want to search for scrambled stations too.
Note: Scrambled stations can only be received with an integrated CA module and
additional card.
Scrambled stations
Search method
Symbol rate
Accept Logical Channel Number
DVB-S settings (ASTRA1 19,2°E)
Back with Proceed with
no
yes
Network search
Frequency search
22000
no
yes
Art 40-60
User guide
30
Initial installation
continued on the next page
p
Setting options for all types of reception:
 Select desired languages and alternative
languages for subtitles and audio for DVB
programmes.
Set up audio commentary for the visually
impaired.
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
You will see a list of the selected settings. You can go
back step by step with the key to make any changes
to the settings.
OK Start automatic search.
Now, the TV set searches for TV and radio stations.
It searches successively for stations from the selected
signal sources. The progress of search is shown by a
progress bar.
In case of a repeated initial installation routine (via
Home view under Extras
p
Special functions)
all stored stations will be first deleted here.
The number of found TV stations is displayed.
Proceed to next step.
The number of found radio stations is displayed.
Proceed to next step.
You can preset the desired languages and reserve languages for subtitles and audio for
DVB programmes here.
You may preset whether you would always like to hear a special tone for visually-impaired
persons (if provided by the station), which describes the operation in more detail, with the
aid of an audio commentary. In "System Settings -> Sound," you can set its volume in
relation to the "normal" volume by means of the "Audio commentary volume."
Note: The newly selected parameter in each case must be confirmed with the button.
Subtitle and audio languages (DVB)
Subtitle (DVB) Audio (DVB) Audio commentary
Favoured language Alternative language
OK
Back with Proceed with
German Italian Czech Hungarian S
Englisch Spanish Greek Finnish T
French Dutch Polish Slovenian S
Subtitle and
audio
languages
(DVB only)
Your TV performs the following automatic search with the listed settings. If you wish to
correct them, please scroll back.
Check search settings
Start automatic search Antenne Wizard Cancel
Back with
Location of TV set (UK) United Kingdom
Signal source(s) Cable analogue, DVB-T, DVB-C, DVB-S
Satellite system Single satellite
Satellite(s) ASTRA1 19,2°E
Check
search
settings
The automatic station search and sort have been stopped.
1164 new TV station(s) has (have) been found.
Result TV
Proceed with
Info
station search
.
 Select Age-related lock.
OK Confirm selection.
You can specify an age limit for your TV set here.
DVB broadcasts which have an appropriate age
identification are locked and can only be watched
after entering the access code.
In some countries, the yes/no option does not
exist for some channels, and a compulsory age
check must be entered.
Proceed to next step.
Depending on the selected network, this step may
be skipped.
 Select time / date.
If no values or no correct values have been
entered for date and time, enter the correct values
with the numerical keys here.
Proceed to next step.
If you enter an age restriction here, all DVB programmers are locked which have an
appropriate age code and can only be watched by entering the access code.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the button.
Age-related lock
Proceed with
No age-related lock Special security level
OK
Age-related
lock
Please enter the date and time if none has been entered or if they are incorrect.
Time and date
Date 14.09.2012
Time 17:45:00
Back with Proceed with
Time and
date
Art 40-60
User guide
31
Initial installation
Select sound components.
OK Confirm selection.
This selection indicates which sound components
you want to use to hear your TV sound. Depend-
ing on the selection, the sound component wizard
starts with which you can make further settings.
The sound component wizard is described in
chapter System settings, section Connec-
tions – Sound components and can also be
started at any time beyond the initial installation.
Proceed to next step.
Select option.
With the selection, specify whether you want to
configure the available network adaptor now.
Configure now: Make settings for network adap-
tor and proxy server (see chapter System
settings,section Multimedia / Network
Network settings).
Do not configure or configure later: Skip
network adaptor configuration.
Proceed to next step.
2NTMCOK@XA@BJUH@
/KD@RDRODBHEXGDQDUH@VGHBGRNTMCBNLONMDMSRXNTV@MSSNKHRSDMSNXNTQ35RNTMC(EXNT
CNMNSV@MSSNKHRSDMDWBKTRHUDKXUH@SGDATHKSHMROD@JDQR@KK@CCHSHNM@KROD@JDQRNQCDUHBDR
must be connected with the audio output sockets AUDIO DIGITAL OUT.
(EXNTG@UD@35RDSVHSGNTSATHKSHMROD@JDQRSGDHSDLRQDK@SHMFSNSGD35ROD@JDQRL@XMNS
be selected.
-NSD3GDMDVKXRDKDBSDCO@Q@LDSDQLTRSADBNMEHQLDCVHSGSGDATSSNM
TV speakers
HiFi/AV amplifier
Soundprojector
HiFi/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable)
Sound projector or TV speakers (switchable)
OK
Back with Proceed with
Sound
playback
via ...
Please specify if you wish to configure a network at this time. You can also perform this at a
more convenient time later (via 'System settings->Multimedia->Netzworksettings-
>Networking').
Netzwork configuration
Configure now Do not configure or configure later
Back with Proceed with
Network
configuration
Select option.
When selecting Information on new software
updates, your TV set checks at definite intervals
whether a newer software than the one installed in the
TV set is available in the Internet. A screen message
appears when a new software update is found.
Back: Exit wizard.
The initial installation wizard is complete.
TV set as a monitor
You can also use your TV set just as a monitor, i.e. if you only use it with
a PC. The tuner in the TV set cannot be used in this mode.
 Select AV connection.
The selected AV connection is shown when
switching the TV on.
Proceed to next step.
Initial setup continues with the Time and date setup.
Software-Update
Back with Finish wizard with
You have the option of performing a software update via the Internet. Please specify
whether the TV set is to automatically inform you about newly available software.
In accordance with the local laws and regulations, we would like to point out that set
numbers, the installation location of your TV set, previous updates and the current
software version will be processed and stored by an IT system, if you wish to perform
software updates via the Internet. This data ensures that we are always able to offer you an
optimum service. All data is treated as confidential.
Note: you can change this setting at any time by selecting the following options: "System
Settings -> Control->Software update -> via Internet"."
Inform about new software Do not inform
Inform about
new software
Please specify which AV channel your TV set should switch on to.
Selection of Switch-on channel
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
PC IN
AVS
AV
VIDEO
Back with Proceed with
Art 40-60
User guide
32
Home view
Home view
The Home view is the central overview page for all of your TV set‘s
operating modes.
The list of options on the left of Home view gives you access to TV,
Video, Audio/Radio, Photo and Web.
By means of Extras and System settings you have access to more
functions and you can configure your TV set.
On the right side of the screen you find all your favourites (bookmarks)
created in the different operating modes.
The number of selectable items varies depending on the TV equip-
ment, network connection, available media/ media servers and con-
nected appliances.
Call Home view
HOME: Call Home view.
 Select menu item / favourite,
OK call.
Das Erste HD
ProSieben
Loewe channel
ZDF HD
VOX
Maxdome
RTL Television
Napster
arte HD
Aupeo
kabel eins
SAT.1
ZDF HD
Extras
Web
Photo
Audio/Radio
Video
TV
System settings
Description of the individual sections/functions:
TV: Here you call the TV mode of your TV set.
See chapter TV for further information.
Video: The item Video gives you access to videos
from local (USB, home network) and online
sources.
See chapter Video for further information.
Audio/Radio: With item Audio/Radio you find music
files from your local server(s) and USB
storage media and you access DVB and
Internet radio.
See chapter Audio/Radio for further
information.
Photo: Via menu item Photo you can view photos
from your local media on your TV screen.
See chapter Photo for further information.
Web: Here you have access to multimedia content
in the Internet (MediaNet) as well as a high-
quality web browser.
See chapter Web for further information..
Extras: Extras contains additional functions and
setting (e.g., Timer list, CA module).
See chapter Extras for further information.
System
settings:
In menu item System settings you find the
configuration menu of the TV set e.g., with
setting for picture, sound, connections or
sound components.
See chapter System settings for further
information.
Activated operating mode
The respective activated operating mode will be indicated in the list
of options by a small playback symbol in the lower right-hand corner
of the Home symbol.
Examples:
TV mode activated.
Audio player (Audio mode) activated.
In the opened Home view, pressing again on the HOME key brings
you back to the respective active operating mode.
Art 40-60
User guide
33
Home view
Favourites
Home - Favourites
You will find your favourites on the right of the individual operating
modes.
You can create favourites in the operating modes of the TV set. In this
way you get a collection of your favourite music titles, your preferred
stations and often visited Internet sites on a single overview page.
After an initial installation, TV stations, online links and radio stations
will already be automatically created as favourites independent of the
installation site of the TV set and of existing Internet links.
Creating favourites
In the operating modes of the TV set you can define the current ob-
ject (station, music title, photo, etc.) as favourite by means of your
remote control.
The favourite will be added to Home view and placed at the end.
Create favourite.
If there are more favourites than can be shown on one
page, this will be indicated by rectangular symbols in
the upper right corner of Home view. Example:
Three pages with favourites exist. The first page of
them is indicated.
Manage favourites
You can edit the existing favourites in Home view. Change the se-
quence of your favourites as you wish or delete favourites you do not
need any more.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark the favourite to be changed.
MENU: Change favourite.
Move favourite or delete it (see below).
Moving favourites
 Move favourite to new position.
BACK: Finish procedure.
Deleting Favourites
TEXT: Delete selected favourite.
BACK: Finish procedure.
Das Erste HD
ProSieben
Loewe channel
ZDF HD
VOX
Maxdome
RTL Television
Napster
arte HD
Aupeo
kabel eins
SAT.1
Das Erste HD
ProSieben
Loewe channel
ZDF HD
VOX
Maxdome
RTL Television
Napster
arte HD
Aupeo
kabel eins
SAT.1
Das Erste HD
ProSieben
Loewe channel
ZDF HD
VOX
Maxdome
RTL Television
Napster
arte HD
Aupeo
kabel eins
SAT.1
ZDF HD
ZDF HDZDF HDZDF HD
Pr
oS
i
ebe
n
ProSiebenProSiebenProSieben
Extras
Web
Photo
Audio/Radio
Video
TV
System settings
Move
Delete
End
Art 40-60
User guide
34
TV
Volume / Station
TV
In TV mode that can be selected via the Home view, you can use the
basic TV functions of your TV set. In TV mode you will have numerous
functionalities at your disposal as, for instance EPG and, if offered by
the station, HbbTV (hybrid broadcast broadband television).
By means of the function list you may call additional options and set-
tings all around TV operation.
Setting the volume
Switching sound off/on
Sound off.
Sound on: Press key again or increase the volume
using V+.
Setting the volume
V+/V– Volume up/down.
The volume control bar will be displayed in the upper
right corner.
The volume control bar can be deactivated in the
menu.
Select station
Select station with P+ / P–
P+/P– Station up/down.
The number and the name of the station along with
the title of the programme and that of the next
programme will be briefly shown. Also, the status
display with time and programme-dependent symbols
appears.
The symbols of the status display are described in
section Status display.
Select station using the numerical keys
1-digit stations
Press the numerical key a little bit longer: The chan-
nel will change immediately.
Or:
Press the numerical key briefly, the station changes
after 2 seconds (changes immediately in case up to 9
stations are stored).
2-digit and 3-digit stations
Press first (and second) numerical key briefly.
Keep the last numerical key pressed a little bit longer:
The channel will change immediately.
Or:
Press all the numerical keys and the channel chang-
es two seconds after the last number was entered (with
up to 99 or 999 saved channels it will change immedi-
ately).
4-digit stations
Press all four numerical keys briefly, the station
changes immediately.
If you select an unoccupied station slot, the next
available station is switched to.
long
short short long
all short
Selecting a station out of the station list
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
OK call station list.
 Mark stations.
OK The marked station will be called.
Length of the station list
There is a possibility to influence the amount of stations by using dif-
ferent station lists.
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
OK call station list.
Call overview of station lists.
 Mark the desired list.
The station list will be changed according to the
available options. The list will be adopted auto
-
matically.
Move to the new selected list.
Explanations of the station lists:
The number and the names of the possible station lists depend on
the available signal sources (antennas, TV reception networks, etc.).
Astra LCN
Analog
DVB-C
DVB-T
Only stations from the selected source / reception
network are indicated in the station list.
AV list
Exclusively AV inputs are shown in the station list.
Personal list
Only stations of the selected personal list are indica-
ted in the station list.
The name of the list may be changed.
Manage lists
Call up the station list editing menu. (System set-
tings
p
Stations
p
Station lists TV).
9 ZDF HD
20:15 - 21:45
Toskana
10 BR Nord HD
21:15 - 21:45
20
:15 -
23
:
30
11 SAT.1
20:14 - 22:19
12 RTL Television
21:15 - 22:15
Dr. House
13 n-tv
21:10 - 22:00
14 ProSieben
ASTRA LCN
9 ZDF HD
20:15 - 21:45
Toskana
10 BR Nord HD
21:15 - 21:45
20
:15 -
23
:
30
11 SAT.1
20:14 - 22:19
12 RTL Television
21:15 - 22:15
Dr. House
13 n-tv
21:10 - 22:00
14 ProSieben
ASTRA LCN
Analogue
DVB-C
DVB-T
AV list
Manage list
Personal list 1
Art 40-60
User guide
35
TV
Station
Selecting stations by means of the expanded station list
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
Press OK longer: Call expanded station list.
 Mark stations.
 Scrolling in the station list is possible.
OK The marked station will be called.
Or:
For numerical sorting: Input the channel number. The
marker will switch to the selected station. The marked
station is shown as a thumbnail picture.
OK The marked station will be called.
For alphabetical sorting: Input the first letter. The first
station for the specified letters is marked.
 Mark the station.
OK The marked station will be called.
Filter and sort options of the expanded station list
Using the on-screen buttons on the bottom line of the expanded sta-
tion list you can filter and sort the station list by various combinations
of options.
With open expanded station list:
Toogle between the expanded station list and the list
of options on the bottom.
0..9 Numerical sorting of the station list.
A..Z Alphabetical sorting of the station list.
Searching This allows you to do targeted searches for stations.
The station name is to be entered via the on-screen
keyboard. Entry is described in chapter General
information on menu operation.
Station lists Select the station list, the stations of which are to be
displayed in the extended station list (e.g., Personal
station list, ASTRA LCN, DVB-C).
All stations Here you can specify if All stations, only HD
stations, Locked stations, Scrambled stations,
Unscrambled stations, CI+ Protected stations,
New found stations or stations No more to be
found from the selected sources shall be indicated.
13 ZDF.kultur HD
14 ZDFinfokanal HD
15 SAT.1 HD
16 RTL HD
17 ProSieben HD
18 VOX HD
19 kabel eins HD
20 SUPER RTL HD
21 N24 HD
22 TELE5 HD
23 SPORT1 HD
24 NICK/CC HD
1 Das Erste HD
2 ZDF HD
3 BR Nord HD
4 SAT.1
5 RTL
6 n-tv
7 ProSieben
8 3sat HD
9 ARTE HD
10 EinsPlus
11 Eurosport
12 ZDF Neo HD
2 ZDF HD
21:00-21:45
Toskana
Expanded station list
A..Z < All stations >< ASTRA LCN >Search
Back
Selecting stations by personal lists
You can save your preferred stations in up to six personal lists (e.g.,
for several users). Each personal list can contain up to 99 stations.
Personal list existing.
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
OK call station list.
 Open overview of station lists.
 Mark the desired personal list,
The station list will be changed according to the
available options. The list will be adopted auto-
matically.
Move to the new selected list.
 Mark the station.
OK The marked station will be called. Or:
Select station directly with numerical keys.
Explanation of the icons following station names:
Locked station
HDTV station
DVB-T station (digital terrestrial via antenna)
DVB-C station (digital via cable)
DVB-S station (digital via satellite)
Coded station
ASTRA
LCN
9 ZDF HD
20:15 - 21:45
Toskana
10 BR Nord HD
21:15 - 21:45
20
:15 -
23
:
30
11 SAT.1
20:14 - 22:19
12 RTL Television
21:15 - 22:15
Dr. House
13 n-tv
21:10 - 22:00
14 ProSieben
Personal list 1
AV list
Manage list
Art 40-60
User guide
36
TV
Status display
Status display
In normal TV mode, without other displays.
INFO: Show status display.
In the left upper corner you will see in the marked field
the number and name of the station, the transmission
time and (if available) the title of the current programme.
The bar (if available) indicates the progress of the
current programme. If information about the current
programme is available, this can be called by pressing
the INFO key again.
In another adjacent field to the right, the programme
info of the following programme is displayed addition-
ally for DVB stations.
The field in the upper right corner contains the time,
the date and, depending on the DVB station and
according to availability, various additional information
which is represented by symbols (see column on the
right).
A window with button descriptions is displayed in the
bottom right corner. The automatic display of the
button descriptions can be switched off (see chapter
System settings, section Control – On-screen
displays.
The status bar is shown automatically every time you
change channels.
The status bar is hidden automatically at the end of
the display time.
If you want to hide the status bar manually before the
display time ends, you can do this with the BACK key.
Explanations of the symbols in the status display:
General symbols:
Language/sound selection available
Subtitles available
Channel selection for multi-channel providers
3D programme
HDTV programme
HbbTV mode available from this station
Digital 2
10 ZDF HD
21:00 - 21:45 Toskana
21:45 - 22:00 heute-journal
21:30 18.07.2013
Timer list
Menu options
Station list
Expanded station list
Value-added service
Last station
Language / sound
Timeshift
Recording
Key explanation
(2sec)
(2sec)
(2sec)
Explanations of the symbols in the status display (cont'd):
Transmitted audio signal:
Mono
Mono audio transmission analogue
Dual
channel
Dual channel sound transmission (Sound1/Sound2)
analogue
1+1
Dual channel sound transmission (Sound1/Sound2)
digital
Stereo
Stereo sound transmission analogue
6WHUHR$$&
Stereo sound transmission (HEAAC)
ܐ
Stereo sound transmission digital (PCM)
۲
'LJLWDO
Dolby digital sound transmission (DD)
۲
'LJLWDO
Dolby digital sound transmission (DD+)
۲
'LJLWDO$$&
Dolby digital AAC+ sound transmission (HEAAC)
MPEG
MPEG sound transmission
Transmitted audio channels:
܂
DD / dts 1.0 / mono
܆
DD / dts / MPEG 2.0
܉
DD / dts 3.0
܈
DD / dts 4.0
܋
DD / dts 5.0
܍
DD / dts 2.1
܅
DD / dts 3.1
܏
DD / dts 4.1
ۿ
DD / dts 5.1
Art 40-60
User guide
37
TV
Function list / AV list
Function list
The function list contains settings and additional options. The indi-
vidual list items will be briefly explained as follows:
The function list can be opened directly in TV mode or via the station
list. Depending on this, some list items may possibly not be available.
In TV mode:
MENU: Call function list.
Or:
OK Call station list,
call function list.
 Mark function,
OK call.
Explanations of the symbols in the function list:
Open Expanded station list.
Call EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) wizard.
Menu item is only displayed as long as the EPG wizard has
not yet been executed.
Call up Language / sound. The sound formats on offer
and their designations depend on the programme being
broadcast.
Menu item will only be indicated when other languages/
sound tracks are available.
Call up selection of Subtitles.
Menu item will only be indicated when subtitles are
available.
Open recording dialogue to programme a Recording.
Call up Sound settings.
Call up and adjust Headphone volume.
Menu item will only be indicated when a headphone is
connected to the TV set.
Call up Picture settings.
Activate PIP (picture in picture).
Move picture vertically up/down.
Switch screen off.
The menu item is only shown when DVB radio or an AV
source is active.
9 ZDF HD
20:15 - 21:45
Toskana
Recording
Subtitles
Sound mode
Here you can display your "Electronic Programme Guide".
Explanations of the symbols in the function list (continued):
Add current station as Favourite to Home view.
Changes the Sorting between numerically and alphabe-
tically.
Call up Edit station list.
Delete stations, shift stations, restore deleted stations.
AV list
Selecting the AV source via the AV list
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
Open up the station list AV list.
 Select desired connection,
OK switch over.
If the selected AV source provides a signal (picture), it
should be visible now.
For the VIDEO selection the set switches to cable
analog, channel E36. The TV set shows the signal of
a signal source device via antenna.
Only playback of the audio signal from the AV source (screen is off)
To play only the sound of a connected media player (e.g. MP3 player),
the AV sources can be selected so that the screen goes blank.
Switching off the screen reduces the power consumption of the
TV set.
Open up the station list AV list.
Select desired connection,
OK press at least for two seconds.
Selecting the AV source via the station list
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
OK call station list.
Call overview of station lists.
 Mark AV list.
The AV list will be displayed.
Move to the AV list.
Mark desired AV source,
OK switch to AV source.
2 HDMI 22 HDMI 2
1 HDMI 11 HDMI 1
3 HDMI 33 HDMI 3
4 HDMI 44 HDMI 4
5 PC IN5 PC IN
6 AVS
AV list
Note: If you press for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
OK
Art 40-60
User guide
38
TV
Electronic Programme Guide
Electronic Programme Guide – EPG
EPG stands for Electronic Programme Guide and provides you with
on-screen programme details. With the system, as with a printed pro-
gramme guide, you can learn about the current programme. In addition
programmes can be sorted according to certain topics, memorised, and
also recordings can be programmed.
If a personal list has been selected, only the programmes of stations
from the personal list are displayed in the programme list.
Starting and ending EPG
EPG: Switch EPG on / off.
EPG is only available for DVB stations.
The first time you start EPG, a wizard will start that
guides you through the necessary presettings.
Depending on the number of stations selected for EPG,
it may take some time until the programme information
is displayed.
EPG wizard
In this dialogue you decide, for which station EPG data should be col-
lected and displayed. With the number of stations the time for noctur-
nal data acquisition will increase. We recommend, also for reasons of
distinctness to select only those stations, which you receive regularly.
When the EPG is started for the first time:
Continue in the wizard and call up the EPG Station
selection.
MENU: Switch between the station list and the
on-screen buttons in the bottom line.
Changing the station list:
 Mark station list in the bottom line,
OK select desired station list.
Select station for EPG:
 Mark the the single station,
OK Select / deselect station for EPG.
For display in the EPG, the selected stations are marked
with a check mark
.
Or:
 select Mark all.
OK All stations of the station list will be activated for EPG.
Or:
 select mark only this one.
OK Only the marked station is activated for EPG.
Verbotene Liebe
10 ZDF HD
11 ARD HD
15 ProSieben
17 SPORT1
19 SIXX
13 VOX
14 Sat. 1
16 kabel eins
18 RTL2
Küstenwache
Die Simpsons
SOKO Wismar
Alles was zählt
Unter uns
push - das SAT.1 Magazin
Die Simpsons Galileo
17:46 18:00 19:00 20:00
Navy CIS
taff
X-Diaries
Köln 50667
mieten, kaufen, wohnen
Berlin - Tag & Nacht
Private Practice Grey‘s Anatomy Top Dog ModelEmergency Room
Brisant
All genresToday
Meaning of the colours in the EPG
The coloured labels indicate the genre of the respective programme.
When filtering with genre selection in the header, the programmes of
the selected genre will be highlighted.
Movies
News
Show
Sports
Child
Music
Arts
Social
Education
Hobby
Series
EPG operation
In the left column there is a list of stations of your currently active
station list (e.g. DVB-C, personal list etc). With the on-screen buttons
in the header of the EPG you can select the day of the programme
preview and filter the programmes as to their genre.
INFO: short: call up detailed information.
long: show key explanations.
 Scrolling in the station list.
 Scrolling through the programmes.
Or:
P+/P– Scrolling in the station list page by page.
RECORD key:
Schedule the recording of the marked
programme for a time.
MENU: Go to header.
 Mark selection of date or genre.
OK Accept changes.
MENU: Move from date to genre or from genre to
station list.
Art 40-60
User guide
39
TV
Electronic Programme Guide
Calling additional information about the programmes
INFO: Call up detailed information.
If there is more information on the selected programme,
it will be indicated here. You find further information
on the indicated programme in the bottom line:
View
The menu item is only available when the selected
programme is on the air.
Watch selected TV programme.
Memorise
This menu item is only available when the selected
programme has not started yet.
Memorise the programme for later watching / liste-
ning.
For further information see column on the right.
Depending on the presetting the TV set will switch
on by itself when it is in standby.
Delete
memo
For programmes being memorised you can also
delete the memo.
Timer list Call up the timer list.
(Recording)
Schedule the recording of the selected programme
for a time (see column on the right).
(Favourite)
Schedule the recording of the selected programme for
a time. Additionally, an entry to the Home favourites
will be added.
Explanation of the symbols in the programme information:
۳
Programme in 16:9 picture format
ܦ
Programme in high picture definition (HDTV)
۲
Programme with Dolby-Digital sound
۴
Transmission of subtitles for hearing-impaired per-
sons
۵
Programme with Parental lock (see chapter System
settings,section Control – Parental lock)
The symbols may also appear in combinations.
5 ProSieben 16:45 07.01.14
16:30-16:58 How I Met Your Mother
Eine Halloween-Party auf dem Dach seines Wohnhauses steht bevor, und
auch dieses Jahr lässt sich Ted das Ereignis nicht entgehen. Doch eigentlich
hofft er, ein Mädchen, das er vor vier Jahren dort getroffen hat, endlich
wiederzusehen.
Barney findet die Idee völlig dämlich und versucht, seinen Freund zu einer
Party bei Victoria‘s Secret zu überreden. Ted gibt die Hoffnung nicht auf,
doch dann taucht spät abends eine ganz andere Frau auf dem Dach auf
und gesellt sich zu ihm ...
5 ProSieben
Detailed info
Back
View Timer list
Programme preview
 Mark desired station in the station list.
OK press long: show preview.
In the top left window, the current programme of the
selected station is displayed now.
Stations are only changed in the preview window.
When exiting EPG, the previous station is displayed.
Jumping to time or station
The marking must be in the station list.
Press the numerical key (0 through 9). The window
Select Time/Station is shown.
 Select time or station,
Enter numbers.
When entering a time, you always jump to the next
occurrence of the entered time (24-hour window).
If the time is already passed today, the time entered
will appear on the following day.
Always enter five digits for station presets, e.g.
00001 for preset 1 or 00134 for preset 134.
OK Activate jump.
Switching to the current broadcast
 Mark current broadcast.
OK press briefly: switch to current broadcast.
The electronic programme guide will be closed.
Verbotene Liebe
10 ZDF HD
11 ARD HD
15 ProSieben
17 SPORT1
19 SIXX
13 VOX
14 Sat. 1
16 kabel eins
18 RTL2
Küstenwache
Die Simpsons
SOKO Wismar
Alles was zählt
Unter uns
push - das SAT.1 Magazin
Die Simpsons Galileo
17:46 18:00 19:00 20:00
Navy CIS
taff
X-Diaries
Köln 50667
mieten, kaufen, wohnen
Berlin - Tag & Nacht
Private Practice Grey‘s Anatomy Top Dog ModelEmergency Room
Brisant
All genresToday
Select time
22:00
?????
Art 40-60
User guide
40
TV
Electronic Programme Guide
Timer programming by means of EPG
You can programme timer recordings of TV programmes conveniently
using the EPG.
Mark the desired broadcast.
RECORD key: Programme timer recording for the TV
programme.
Timer data dialogue is opened.
Check the timer data and update it if necessary.
See chapter Extras,section Timer for explanations of the setting
options in the Timer data menu.
In the EPG a recording symbol is placed behind the title of the
programme.
Memorising a programme via the EPG
A programme that has not started yet can be memorised. For
memorised programmes, the TV set will ask at the beginning of a
programme if it should change the channel accordingly or switch on
from the stand-by mode if this is activated in the System settings
p
Control
p
EPG menu.
Mark the desired programme.
OK Call up detailed information.
 Mark Memorise,
OK Memorise programme.
In the EPG a memorise symbol is placed behind the title of the
programme.
The memo of programmes can also be started via the timer list instruc-
tions (s
ee chapter Extras,section Timer
).
After a software update, it is likely that Memos of programmes are
deleted. After a software update, please check your timer list
(see
chapter Extras, section Timer – Timer list).
Verbotene Liebe
10 ZDF HD
11 ARD HD
15 ProSieben
17 SPORT1
19 SIXX
13 VOX
14 Sat. 1
16 kabel eins
18 RTL2
Küstenwache
Die Simpsons
SOKO Wismar
Alles was zählt
Unter uns
push - das SAT.1 Magazin
Die Simpsons Galileo
17:46 18:00 19:00 20:00
Navy CIS
taff
X-Diaries
Köln 50667
mieten, kaufen, wohnen
Berlin - Tag & Nacht
Private Practice Grey‘s Anatomy Top Dog ModelEmergency Room
Brisant
All genresToday
DR+
18:00 - 18:50 Verbotene Liebe
12 Das Erste
14.09.2012
18:00
18:50
Recorder
Programme
Station
Date
Beginning
End
Recording type
Timer data - Recording
Record station
Back
Data part 1 Data part 2
Once only Mon-Fri Daily Weekly
Adapting the EPG Overview
The options to be selected are in the header,
if not, press MENU key.
Select day or genre.
OKConfirm selection.
Example If you look for the next newscast select and news under
genre. Newscasts will be highlighted.
PIP: PIP: Switch in EPG view between standard and
compact view.
Configuring EPG
You can find the EPG settings in the chapter System settings,section
Control – EPG).
18:00 - 18:50
Verbotene Liebe
10
ZDF HD
11
RTL Television
12
Das Erste HD
12
Das Erste HD
13
SAT.1 Bayern
14
ProSieben
14
ProSieben
15
19:25 - 20:15
Küstenwache
17:58 - 18:29
Die Simpsons
16:55 - 17:55
taff
18:00 - 18:50
SOKO Wismar
19:05 - 19:40
Alles was zählt
17:30 - 18:00
Unter uns
19:15 - 19:59
push - das SAT.1 Magazin
18:29 - 18:58
Die Simpsons
18:58 - 20:14
Galileo
19:00 - 20:0018:00 - 19:0017:00 - 18:00
17:15 - 18:00
Brisant
17:46 18:00 19:00 20:00
Today
News
Art 40-60
User guide
41
TV
Teletext
Teletext
Your TV set supports the two operating systems TOP text and FLOF.
Up to 1,000 / 2,000 pages
(1
are stored so that you have quick access.
Starting and ending Teletext
TEXT: Call teletext.
The function of the TEXT key can be set. The factory
default is Standard teletext first.
TEXT: Switching between Standard Teletext and
MediaText.
Pressing the BACK key ends Teletext.
Key functions for Standard Teletext operation
0 AV: Stop self changing pages.
9: Zoom in the page (press several times).
: Add active Teletext page to Home favourites.
Page selection with the coloured keys
Red key: One page back or back to previous page
(depending on Teletext provider).
Green key: advance one page.
Yellow key: To next topic.
Blue key: To next range of topics.
The coloured bars (near TOP) or the coloured writing
(near FLOF) in the last to bottom line show you which
colour button you need to use to select which topic
areas and topics.
Page selection with P+/P–
P+ call next Teletext page.
P– call previous Teletext page.
Tagesschau.... 101 Kultur........ 400
Wirtschaft.... 170 Wissen........ 500
Sport..... 200/600 Ratgeber...... 530
Programm...... 300 Inhalt (A-Z).. 790
Syrien: Botschafter läuft über .. 107
EuGH hebt Saatgut-Verbot auf .... 121
Bundeswehr:Feldpostaffäre beendet 112
Neun Tote bei Lawinenunglück ..... 142
Live: Ticker, 11.Etappe der Tour. 666
Galatasaray will Hamit Altintop.. 211
NBA: Kaman spielt mit Nowitzki... 220
100 100 ARDtext Do 12.07.12 14:12:42
ARD
Text
– +
Wirtschaft Nachrichten
14:00 Tagesschau
14:10 ARD-Mittagsmagazin ..... 312
15:00 Tagesschau
Das Erste
Back
Additional page selection possibilities
First possibility:
INFO: Call overview page 100.
Second possibility:
Directly enter the page number.
Third possibility:
The page includes 3-digit page numbers.
Mark desired page number.
OK Call page.
Fourth possibility:
The page consists of several sub-pages, indicated by
the symbol
and the arrows in the bottom line.
 Go to bottom line.
 Mark
or ,
OK select previous / next sub-page.
The number of the current sub-page is shown
between the arrows.
Explanation of the symbols in the Teletext bottom line
Symbol
(icon)
Remote
control key
Description
For Teletext pages with sub-pages:
Show previous sub-page.
For Teletext pages with sub-pages:
Show next sub-page.
Hide TV picture (Teletext as full screen).
Insert TV picture (Split screen Teletext/
TV Picture).
Activate Newsflash mode.
Show hidden information on the Teletext
page.
Hide information on the Teletext
page again.
Add current Teletext page to the favou-
rites in Home view.
Call function list with Teletext settings.
Tagesschau.... 101 Kultur........ 400
Wirtschaft.... 170 Wissen........ 500
Sport..... 200/600 Ratgeber...... 530
Programm...... 300 Inhalt (A-Z).. 790
Syrien: Botschafter läuft über .. 107
EuGH hebt Saatgut-Verbot auf .... 121
Bundeswehr:Feldpostaffäre beendet 112
Neun Tote bei Lawinenunglück ..... 142
Live: Ticker, 11.Etappe der Tour. 666
Galatasaray will Hamit Altintop.. 211
NBA: Kaman spielt mit Nowitzki... 220
100 100 ARDtext Do 12.07.12 14:12:42
ARD
Text
– +
Wirtschaft Nachrichten
14:00 Tagesschau
14:10 ARD-Mittagsmagazin ..... 312
15:00 Tagesschau
Das Erste
Back
(1
Depending on the type of TV set (see chapter Technical Data).
Art 40-60
User guide
42
TV
Teletext
Newsflash
Some text pages, e.g., live tickers, will be permanently updated. In
order to keep track of changes and also to be able to watch the TV
programme at the same time you may hide the Teletext temporarily
and can still remain informed on updates of the page.
 Mark
Newsflash,
confirm with OK.
The future behaviour of the News function depends on the type of
the Teletext page:
In case of Full screen Teletext pages the Teletext will be hidden. In
the upper left corner, there will be a symbol for the activated news
function. A screen message appears when the contents of the page
has changed:
Show updated page,
 yes or no.
OK Confirm selection.
In case of Teletext pages which cover only a part of the Teletext page,
e.g., News tickers, the respective part will be faded in and permanently
updated.
End News function
OK show Teletext again.
Or:
BACK: exit Teletext.
Art 40-60
User guide
43
(1
Depending on the settings selected.
TV
HbbTV / MediaText
HbbTV / MediaText
HbbTV
(1
(Hybrid broadcast broadband television) offers the user
comprehensive multimedia contents, e.g., media centres or additional
information on the current programme as far as they are provided by
the station.
MediaText helps you to use the next generation of teletext/videotext
for HbbTV.
MediaText/HbbTV text can either be started directly or through an
HbbTV application.
The TV must be connected to the Internet to use HbbTV/MediaText.
A connection speed of at least 6,000 kbit/s (DSL 6000 or equiva-
lent) is recommended for smooth playback of videos.
Open HbbTV application
If an HbbTV application is available for the chosen channel after chang-
ing channels, this will be loaded during the automatic start process and
a red key symbol will appear. When starting manually, the application
will only be loaded by pressing the red key.
HbbTV is offered by the selected channel.
Connection to the Internet established.
HbbTV mode is set to on.
Red key: Load / display HbbTV application.
The appearance, key assignment and available
functions of the HbbTV applications are dependent on
the provider.
Under certain circumstances, the recording and
bookmarking functions of the applications may not be
supported.
Loewe do not guarantee the accessibility, functionality
or content of HbbTV applications.
Hide / Close HbbTV application
BACK: Hide / Close HbbTV application.
Depending on the start behaviour set, the HbbTV
application will be hidden (automatically) or closed
(manually). In the start behaviour Automatic, you
need to press the BACK key a second time for closure.
You will see a screen message after closing.
Open HbbTV text directly
Depending on the programme provider, the direct
Call of MediaText may not be possible. MediaText
must then be opened by means of the HbbTV appli-
cation.
MediaText/HbbTV text is offered by the selected
channel.
Connection to the Internet established.
TEXT: Call up “standard” Teletext (see chapter TV,
section Teletext).
By pressing the TEXT key a second time the Media-
Text/HbbTV-Text will be called up.
The function of the TEXT key can be set.
Navigation within the HbbTV text and how the col-
oured buttons are assigned can vary depending on
the provider.
Exiting HbbTV-Text
Pressing the BACK key ends HbbTV text.
Art 40-60
User guide
44
z
possible
not possible
TV
Digital Recorder
Digital-Recorder – Overview of functions
You can use the Digital Recorder of your Loewe TV set to record programmes on an external hard disk connected via USB (USB recording).
USB recording is only possible for TV set without integrated hard disk.
The various ways in which your Digital Recorder can be used are listed below.
Format USB discs that you wish to use with the TV set before the first use (see chapter System settings, section Control – Hard disks).
Digital Recorder function USB Recording
Delay TV in live play mode (timeshift)
Archive recording on the integrated hard disk
Archive recording on the USB storage device (external hard disk)
z
Recording / Time delay with digital stations (DVB-C/-T/-S)
z
Recording / Time delay with analogue stations
View other channels whilst the archive recording is taking place
Subsequent archive recording
Delay TV when archive recording is running
z
View other channels with delay TV whilst the archive recording is taking place
Archive playback from DR+
Archive playback from USB storage devices (external hard disk)
z
Copy recorded programmes from DR+ onto a USB storage device
Copy recorded programmes onto an external recorder
Copy recorded programmes from one USB storage device to another
z
Permit recorded programmes to be viewed on the network
View programmes that have been permitted to be viewed over the network
Set/delete manual bookmarks
z
Hide parts of a recording
z
Start up „Follow me“
Continue to view „follow me“ once it has started
z
Art 40-60
User guide
45
TV
Digital Recorder
Archive recording
Films that you wish to watch at a later date can be recorded in the
Digital Recorder Archive (DR+ archive).
If EPG or teletext data is available, the Digital Recorder stores the title
and additional information on each programme in the archive.
If additional languages are being transmitted for a DVB broadcast,
these are also recorded. DVB subtitles can also be recorded. Language
selection and subtitles are displayed as in TV mode.
You can play back a pre-recorded programme from the archive whilst
another TV programme is being recorded into the archive. You can also
play back the programme that you are just recording with time delay.
During the archive recording, the bar showing the recording progress
is red.
Recording of analogue stations is not possible.
Recordings of CI Plus encrypted programmes are perhaps not
possible or only to a limited extent.
Direct recording
Record interesting programmes directly into the DR+ archive by press-
ing the RECORD key.
Press the RECORD key for a short period: Start direct
recording.
Recording dialogue for the current broadcast is called.
 Select recording time,
OK proceed.
Check timer data and correct if necessary.
OK Start recording.
One Touch Recording
With One Touch Recording, the recording starts immediately at the
press of a button.
Press RECORD key longer: Start One Touch Recording.
 Select recording time,
confirm with OK.
Check timer data and correct if necessary.
OK Adopt broadcast in timer data.
Timer-controlled recording
Comfortably select your favourite programme for recording from the
EPG. The timer overview has room for 50 entries.
You will find further information on timer-recording in chapter Extras,
section Timer.
Time shift viewing during archive recording
Whilst an archive recording is taking place you can watch the pro-
gramme that is just being recorded in the archive using time delay.
PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.
The recording is continued in the background.
Display during time-shift viewing and archive record-
ing:
PLAY key: Continue playback.
You will now see the time-shift archive recording.
For further options of time-shift watching see chapter
Video, section Video playback.
STOP key: End time shift and return to the live picture
of the current archive recording.
Setting bookmarks during archive recording
During a running archive recording you can create bookmarks (by
pressing the PLAY key a little longer). You will see a message on the
screen.
Bookmarks also serve as starting and end points of intervals.
Viewing another programme from the archive during archive
recording
After you have started the recording, you can also watch a programme
you have already recorded.
Open the DR+ archive.
Mark the recorded programme,
OK view programme.
The recording process is continued in the background.
Subtitles
Subtitles of a broadcast can also be stored during recording.
The recording of subtitles in DR+ continuous mode must be acti-
vated in the settings.
Calling up the subtitles during a later playback is similar to calling
subtitles in TV mode.
Digital 2
21:09 21.01.2013
2 ZDF 20:15 - 21:45 Rundreise Gardasee
20:15 21:04 21:50Time shift
05:00 min
Back
Art 40-60
User guide
46
TV
Digital Recorder
Switching off the TV set during recording
You can switch off the TV to standby whilst recording. The recording
is continued in the standby mode.
Never switch the TV set off at the mains and do not pull out the
plug of the TV set out of the socket. Otherwise the recording will
be lost!
Stop recording early
You can end a current archive recording prematurely.
Press STOP key.
A message appears in the right upper corner of the
screen.
OK Stop recording.
The recording process is ended. The portion of the TV
broadcast recorded up to this point is saved on the
hard disk and can be played back via the DR+ archive.
You can also end a running recording by deleting the
corresponding timer entry in the timer overview.
Stop recordingStop recording
OkOk CancelCancel
Art 40-60
User guide
47
TV
Digital Recorder
(1
Menu item will only be indicated when a motorized stand is connected to the TV set.
DR+ archive
With the DR+ archive you have access to all the recorded programmes
and start playback.
An automatic Delete Manager always ensures that there is sufficient
recording space for new movies.
Open the DR+ archive
Open the DR+ archive.
 Select desired archive,
OK Display archive entries.
PIP: switch in DR+ archive view between standard and
compact view.
Playing from the DR archive
 Mark the required archive entry,
OK Start or continue replaying the selected archive
entry.
During the playback of DR+ archive entries, the out-
put signal for external devices at the AV connection
is switched off.
Explanation of broadcast information
The progress bar in the upper part of the broadcast information shows
you how much of the recording has already been watched.
Further information on the recording, as far as available, can be called
via the function list (see column on the right).
Archive entry with set parental lock
Archive entry with set Delete protection
Archive entry with active playback
...... Unsere Tierwelt
20:15 - 22:00
21.09.12 ZDF HD
Unsere Tierwelt
DR+
1/4
......
The Big Bang Theory 22.10.13 ProSieben
Volle Kanne Service täglich 14.09.13 ZDF HD 14.09.13 ZDF HD
Richterin Salesch 14.10.13 SAT.1 14.10.13 SAT.1
Rote Rosen (1597) 21.10.13 Das Erste HD 21.10.13 Das Erste HD
Sturm der Liebe (1850) 20.10.13 Das Erste HD 20.10.13 Das Erste HD
Morgenmagazin 10.10.13 Das Erste HD 10.10.13 Das Erste HD
Breaking Bad 16.10.13 AXN Action 16.10.13 AXN Action
Familien im Brennpunkt 13.09.13 RTL Television13.09.13 RTL Television
Blumen der Welt 17.09.12 Das Erste17.09.12 Das Erste
The Big Bang Theory
20:15 - 22:00
22.10.13 ProSieben
The Big Bang Thoery
DR+
1/1
DR+ archive function list
The function list of the DR+ archive contains the individual function
for its archive entries.
Mark the recorded broadcast.
MENU: call function list.
Detailed info Show detailed information on the marked archive
entry.
Sorting Sort archive entries in alphabetical (ascending A-Z
or descending Z-A) order or according to recording
date (newest entries first).
Rename Change title of archive entry.
Delete Delete archive entry from hard disk and recover
disk space.
Copy/Move Copying/moving an archive entry to another external
hard disk.
When moving, the recording will be deleted automati-
cally from the source after it has been successfully
copied.
Favourite Add archive entry to Home favourites.
See chapter Home view for further information.
Delete
protection
Activate or deactivate protection against automatic
deletion by the Delete Manager.
Parental
lock
Protect recorded broadcast against unauthorised
playback.
The menu item is only available when a access
code is defined in the parental lock (see chapter
System settings, section Control – Parental
lock).
Repeat Play archive entry repeatedly (in a loop) when the
archive entry is replayed in the future.
Settings opens the video settings.
...
Detailed info
SortingSorting
RenameRename
DeleteDelete
Copy/MoveCopy/Move
FavouriteFavourite
Delete
protection
Delete
protection
Parental-
lock
Parental-
lock
RepeatRepeat
Art 40-60
User guide
48
TV
Digital Recorder
Displaying detailed information on the recording
If detailed information exists on the recorded broadcast from the EPG,
you can deplay it.
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
MENU: Call function list.
 Mark Detailed info,
OK Display detailed information on the broadcast.
For the explanation of the symbols in the bottom line
see chapter TV, section EPG.
Changing the title of an archive
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
MENU: Call function list.
 mark Rename,
OK Call.
 Select characters,
OK Move character to input line.
For further information on character input see chapter
General information on menu operation.
End input with Adopt. This saves the change
permanently.
Or:
BACK: Cancel renaming.
Die mehrteilige Dokumentation "Unsere Tierwelt" liefert
Ihnen bisher nie gezeigte, unglaubliche Einblicke in die
heimische Welt der Tiere.
Das Erste HD
20:15 - 22:00
Unsere Tierwelt
Unsere Tierwelt
Detailed info
Back
View
......
Unsere Tierwelt|
Q
A
Y
1
W
S
X
2
E
D
C
3
R
F
V
4
T
G
B
5
Z
H
N
6
U
J
M
7
I
K
.-/
8
O
L
9
P
³
0
abc
Rename
Rename
Back
Space Delete Cancel Adopt
(2 sec) on a letter with a triangle shows more letters
OK
Deleting recordings from the archive
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
STOP key: Call delete dialogue.
Or:
MENU: Call function list.
Mark Delete,
OK call.
OK Confirm deletion. The DR+ archive will be
displayed again.
Or:
 Select no,
OK Cancel procedure and return to function list.
It may take some time to delete recordings from
external hard disks, depending on the length of the
programme and recording quality. To ensure a correct
deletion process, cancel the presence of the external
hard disk via MediaHome, before unplugging it from
the TV set. You will see a screen message as soon as
the hard disc can be removed.
... Blumen der Welt (10)
19:00 - 19:45
19.09.12 Das Erste HD
Blumen der Welt (10)
DR+
3/9
DR+
3/9
Art 40-60
User guide
49
TV
Digital Recorder
Copying/Moving your recordings
You can also copy/move programmes to a further external hard disk,
and archive them in this way.
Copying/moving recordings, which originate from
a CI Plus encrypted station, is perhaps not possible
or only to a limited extent.
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
MENU: Call funktionlist.
 Mark Copy/Move,
OK Call.
Select target in Timer Data Dialogue.
Select Copy or Move.
OK Start the procedure.
When moving, the recording will be deleted automatically from the
source after it has been successfully copied.
Copying to an external hard disk takes place in the background and
at a significantly higher speed. You see a screen message, when
copying has finished.
The status of copying assignments in progress/pending can be
seen in the timer list.
The TV set must not be switched off with the mains switch during
the copying process!
...
Copy/Move
Timer data
Back
Target
Programme
EXTHDD
20.09.12 ZDF HD Unsere Tierwelt
USB2
Copy MoveCopy
Setting/cancelling delete protection
You can provide films with a delete protection to prevent an automatic
deletion by the delete manager.
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
MENU: Call function list.
 Mark Delete protection,
OK Call.
 Mark yes / no,
OK Adoptsettings.
Delete manager
The Delete Manager always makes sure there is enough memory space
on the hard disk for new recordings.
If the capacity on the hard disk is nearly fully exhausted, the oldest
recording(s) are automatically deleted in order to create space on
the hard disc.
Recordings which have been protected with a delete protection are
not deleted by the Delete Manager. However, you can still delete these
recordings manually.
To avoid data loss, we recommend copying important recordings to
an external USB hard disk.
Delete the recordings from the Digital Recorder after copying.
Loewe are not liable for data loss from the Digital Recorder’s hard
disk.
...
Delete
protection
yes
nono
Adopt with
OK
Art 40-60
User guide
50
TV
Digital Recorder
Locking/unlocking a movie (Parental lock)
You can lock movies that your children are not permitted to view, for
instance. Playback is then only possible after entering a PIN.
In order to activate the Parental lock, a code num-
ber (PIN) must have been defined beforehand
(see chapter System settings, section Control
– Parentol lock).
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
MENU: Call function list.
 Mark Parental lock,
OK Call.
 Select Ye s / No,
OKAdopt.
The titles of locked films in the DR+ archive will be
replaced by asterisks * when a parental lock is active
and thus cannot be read anymore. The detailed
information for the recording cannot be called up.
The cover of the recording will be replaced by a
picture of a lock. In addition, the entry will be labelled
with the symbol
.
Viewing a locked movie
The desired locked entry in the DR+ archive is
marked.
When the access code of the parental lock has not
been entered yet:
OK call entry of PIN.
Enter your PIN.
After the access code has been entered, the lock
of the archive entries will be temporarily released.
OK View film.
...
Parental
lock
yes
nono
Adopt with
OK
... DR+
1/4
DR
+
Streaming
You can use your TV set to view DR+ archive entries via the network
provided by „another“ Loewe TV set with an integrated hard disk on
the network.
To use DR+ Streaming, at least two Loewe TV sets with MB180,
SL1xx or SL2xx chassis are required (at least one of which has
DR
+
integrated). The TV sets also need to be connected via a
wireless connection (WLAN) or a cable connection (e.g. Ethernet,
PowerLine).
DR+ Streaming must be enabled in the system settings.
Archive entries can only be provided or released in the network by
TV sets with integrated hard disks (DR+).
Playback of released archive entries is possible on all TV sets with
MB180, SL1xx (with/without DR+) and SL2xx chassis linked to
the network.
Functions that would require write access to a released device
(parental lock, delete protection, renaming, deleting an entry or
bookmark, creating a bookmark, deleting/hiding parts of a record-
ing) are not available during playback of a DR+ archive entry via
the network.
Playback of DR+ archive entry via the network
Open the DR+ archive.
 Select desired archive,
OK Display archive entries.
 Mark the required archive entry,
OK View archive entry.
Follow me function
Using your TV as a second unit you simply continue watching a
programme where you have interrupted it on another Loewe TV set
(with integrated hard drive).
Also use other archives is enabled at the target TV set (see chapter
System settings, section ControlDR+).
You can indicate the beginning of a follow me recording in your
network by a screen display.
A programme (follow me recording) is provided and approved by
the recording TV set on the network.
Continue Follow me recording on a second TV set
Open the DR+ archive.
 Select archive of the recording TV set,
OK Display archive entries.
 Mark follow me recording,
OK View recording.
......
Urlaubsziele
Natur pur
18.08.12 ZDF HD
Festungen, Burgen, Schlösser (5)
20:00 - 21:00
16.09.12 arte HD
Festungen, Burgen, Schlösser (5)
Remote TVBA
Art 40-60
User guide
51
(1
The assignment of the AUDIO key can be changed. The description refers to the standard setting.
TV
Media
+
General information on media reproduction
Home view gives you access to photos, videos and music from your
personal storage media, e.g., from storage media connected via USB
and from media servers in your home network to which your TV set
is connected.
The item Web gives you access to an Internet browser and multimedia
data from the Internet.
Please follow also the information below for the MediaNet Internet
functions which can be called under Web.
Connecting the TV set to your network
To receive media via media servers in your home network or via the
Internet, you have to integrate your TV set in your home network. You
can connect your TV set both with a wired connection (Ethernet,
PowerLine) or via a wireless radio connection (WLAN). For wireless
connections, the TV set has an internal WLAN antenna.
Your Loewe TV set supports the UPnP AV standard for data playback
in the home network. You can find more detailed information on this
in the chapter Glossary.
Help for configuration problems
Loewe cannot provide any support for PC hardware and software or
network components owing to the diverse configuration options with
home networks.
Please contact the administrator of your home network and/or specialist
dealer for support when setting up and for maintenance of network con-
nections, storage media, media server software and network devices,
e.g. routers.
MediaNet
If you wish to use MediaNet we recommend registering your TV set
on our homepage.
http://support.loewe.tv (International),
http://support.loewe.tv/uk ( United Kingdom and Republic of
Ireland),
http://support.loewe.tv/au (Australia) or
http://support.loewe.tv/nz (New Zealand).
(using the Register free-of-charge option).
Simply follow the steps in the registration process.
The MAC address of your TV set is required for the registration. You
can find this in the TV set under Extras ט Special functions ט
Integrated features ט MAC address (TV).
Accessing your media
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark desired function,
OK call function.
Video: see chapter Video.
Audio/Radio: see chapter Audio/Radio.
Photo: see chapter Photo.
Web: see chapter Web.
Playing music and videos, displaying images
The windows for playing music and videos and for displaying photos
are comparable for all cases irrespective of the media source. The
relevant players are therefore grouped together.
Exit media
HOME: Call Home view and select another function
(see above).
Or:
Press TV or AUDIO key for TV and radio mode swap-
ping
(1
.
Das Erste HD
ProSieben
Loewe channel
ZDF HD
VOX
Maxdome
RTL Television
Napster
arte HD
Aupeo
kabel eins
SAT.1
ZDF HD
Extras
Web
Photo
Audio/Radio
Video
TV
System settings
Art 40-60
User guide
52
Video
Video
The item Video gives you access to videos from local (USB, home
network) and online sources. The individual subitems are described
in detail in the following.
High definition movie material (HD movies) from format 720p
upwards (resolution 1280 x 720 or higher) should be played back
via a wired connection. If there is a wireless connection, then
technical limitations (e.g., fault liability, bandwidth limitations) can
cause disruptions in the playback right up to a complete breakdown
of the playback.
Calling video selection
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark Video,
OK call list of video sources.
 Mark function,
OK call.
DR+ archive
Programmes that you have recorded using the
Digital Recorder are compiled in the DR+ archive.
Via the DR+ archive you can replay, edit or delete
your recorded programmes.
For further information see in chapter TV, section
Digital Recorder – DR+ archive
MediaNet
Call MediaNet טBrowse טVideo.
USB USB storage media on the USB connections of
your TV set. The exact designation depends on the
relevant storage medium.
Twonky-
Media
WMP11
Examples with media servers in your home network.
The exact designation depends on the media server
used.
Timer Call up the timer list (siehe chapter Extras,section
Timer – Timer list).
Please also observe the notes in chapter System
settings, section Control – Software update
regarding USB sticks!
The media sources shown here depend on the
devices available/used.
MediaNet
TwonkyMedia
WMP11
USB
Ajastin
DR+ archive
Video Function list
The video function list contains the individual functions for your videos.
MENU: Open function list.
The availability of the following items depends on the currently
marked object (data source, directory, file).
Unmount
Unmount USB data storage medium before remo-
ving it in order to prevent data loss.
Sorting Sort videos in alphabetical (ascending A-Z or descen-
ding Z-A) order, file size or date (newest entries first).
Favourite Add video to the Home favourites..
Settings opens the video settings.
 Mark desired function,
OK Confirm selection.
Selecting videos
 Mark desired directory,
OK open directory.
Repeat procedure if necessary.
 Mark desired video,
OK Start or continue playback of the selected video
Video_2.avi
0.68 GB
Video_3.avi
1.03 GB
Video_4.avi
0.04 GB
Video_5.avi
0.29 GB
Video_6.avi
0.19 GB
Video_7.avi
0.74 GB
Video 8 avi
......
Sorting
Favourite
Settings
......
Video_2.avi
0.68 GB
Video_3.avi
1.03 GB
Video_4.avi
0.04 GB
Video_5.avi
0.29 GB
Video_6.avi
0.19 GB
Video_7.avi
0.74 GB
Video 8 avi
USB1
......
Source: USB1
Title: Video_1.avi
Size: 0.47 GB
Art 40-60
User guide
53
Video
Video playback
General information on video playback
The description of the following functions applies to the playback of
videos from the DR+ archive as well as for videos from USB storage
media or from media servers in the home network.
For playback of DR+ archive entries we have additional playback
and editing capabilities. The explanation of these functions you find
in section Additional functions for DR+ archive playback.
During the playback of DR+ archive entries, the output signal for
external devices at the AV connection is switched off.
Video status display
The video status bar provides you with further options on the current
playback.
 Show status bar.
BACK: Hide the status display again.
Description of the symbols in the status display for video
playback
Symbol Remote
control key
Description
Call list view (select video).
For playback of videos from USB sto-
rage media or from the home network:
Switch repetition (loop playback) of all
titles of the current directory ON/OFF.
For playback of videos from USB sto-
rage media or from the home network:
Switch ON/OFF repetition (loop play-
back) of the current title.
Change picture format of the video
playback.
long
Only for playback from DR+ archive:
Set bookmark manually.
In case of time-shifted viewing the time-
shifted recording will be converted into
an archive recording.
11:27
hh:mm
Digital 2
00:00
38:42
45:00
21.01.2013
Back
DR+ archive : ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
Symbol Remote
control key
Description
long
only for playback from DR+ archive:
Delete bookmark manually.
The function is only available when
a manually set bookmark is within
five seconds around the playback
position.
Only for playback from DR+ archive:
Skip to next bookmark.
only for playback from DR+ archive:
Skip to previous bookmark.
only for playback from DR+ archive:
Call dialogue for deleting bookmarks.
only for playback from DR+ archive:
Call interval functions.
only for playback from DR+ archive:
Use current still image at title image in
the DR+ archive.
For playback from DR+ archive:
Activate / deactivate again the repetition
of the currently played archive entry.
Skip to desired position in the playback.
Add currently played video to the favou-
rites in Home view.
Call detailed info on the current play-
back.
Call function list with video settings.
hh:mm
Art 40-60
User guide
54
Video
Pause playback (freeze picture)
PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.
PLAY key: Continue playback.
Jump
By briefly pressing the or keys you can skip forwards and back-
wards in the movie. The jump distance is adjustable.
Skip forwards.
Skip backwards.
00:00
38:42
45:00
hh:mm
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
00:00
38:42
45:00
hh:mm
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
00:00
34:42
45:00
hh:mm
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
Skipping with Smart jump
The Smart jump function ensures that the jump width is halved each
time the jump direction is changed or doubled after three jumps in
the same direction (max. 8 minutes). This way you can quickly find a
certain spot of the recording.
The settings for Smart jump you find in the System settings under
Controlטmore ...טDR+טSmart jump.
For example, you are searching for the beginning of a broadcast that
has already started:
Press repeatedly quickly to jump back.
If you have jumped past the beginning of the pro-
gramme, jump in the opposite direction:
Press . This jump in the opposite direction is only
carried out for half the jump distance. Jump
forward using .
If you have jumped past the start of the programme:
Jump back again. In the process, the jump
distance is cut in half again.
By halving the jump distance when changing direction again you can
find your way to a specific position.
Jump by entering a time
You can jump to any position in the video by entering a time.
 Show status bar.
 mark hh:mm (Jump to ...).
Enter the desired time with the numerical keys.
OK Execute jump.
00:00
36:42
45:00
hh:mm
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
00:00
38:42
45:00
00:38
Back
DR+ Archiv: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
Art 40-60
User guide
55
Video
Wind
To search for desired scenes in movies you can fast forward and rewind
at three different speeds. Sound is not audible during winding.
or press a little bit longer.
By each brief pressing of or the speed will increase
until you switch back to the first speed.
Available speeds: 2x, 5x, 10x.
In case of time-shift viewing, playback is auto-
matically activated when the end of the recording
is reached. You are then about 10 seconds behind
the live picture or when rewinding at the beginning
of the time shift recording.
In case of Fast forward of archive entries, playback
will finish at the end of the recording. The DR+ ar-
chive is displayed again.
PLAY key: Continue playback.
In the case of Internet videos, please wait until these
are buffered in the memory. This can take a few
seconds, depending on the bit rate of the film and
Internet speed.
00:00
40:42
hh:mm
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
00:00
43:42
hh:mm
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
Repeat
Videos can be repeated, i.e., replayed in an endless loop. Depending
on the source (DR+ archive, USB storage medium, media server in
the network), single or all videos can be replayed in an endless loop.
Repeated playback of DR+ archive entries
 Show status bar.
 mark Repeat
,
confirm with OK.
The current archive entry will be replayed repeatedly.
The repetition setting remains active for this archive
entry even when the playback is finished.
To deactivate playback again:
 mark Repeat off
,
confirm with OK.
Repeating videos from USB storage media or media servers
 Show status bar.
 mark Repeat title
,
OK Switch the repetition of the individual video ON/
OFF.
The repeat setting remains until it will be deacti-
vated or another video is replayed.
Or:
 mark Repeat all
,
OK Switch repetition of all titles of the current direc-
tory ON/OFF.
The repeat setting remains until it will be deacti-
vated or another directory in the overview is
selected.
Repeat title and Repeat all cannot be activated simultaneously.
Using one of the two functions deactivates the respective other one.
Art 40-60
User guide
56
Video
Slow motion
At an active pause (freeze frame) you can select from four slow mo-
tion speeds (for wind/rewind). There is no sound during slow motion
replay. When viewing HDTV slow motion backwards is not possible.
PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.
Press or briefly.
Increase speed:
Press or several times briefly.
The speed increases every time you press the button
until eventually switching back to the initial speed.
00:00
38:42
45:00
hh:mm
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
00:00
38:42
45:00
hh:mm
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
00:00
38:44
45:00
hh:mm
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
Select language/sound
Videos, especially those recorded from TV broadcasts, can contain
several sound tracks. Select sound track/language:
 Show status bar.
 mark Settings
,
OK Call settings.
 mark Language/sound,
OK call Language/Sound selection.
 mark desired sound or desired language,
OK select sound track.
Changing the picture format
 Show status bar.
 Mark Change Picture format
,
OK set picture format.
You can choose between small or full image settings.
Small image setting shows the video close to the
original resolution. The video status bar is perma-
nently shown below the image.
The full image setting enlarges the image to fit the
entire screen. The status bar can be set to visible or
hidden.
Dolby Digital
2.0
Dolby Digital
2.0
Dolby Digital
5.1
Dolby Digital
5.1
Language /
sound
stereo Adopt with
OK
You can select other movie languages and other sound
formats here.
Art 40-60
User guide
57
Video
Additional functions for DR+ archive playback
There are additional editing and playback functions for playback of
recorded programmes from the DR+ archive. These are explained
as follows.
Setting bookmarks
To retrieve interesting scenes in a movie later, you can manually set the
bookmarks. In addition, there are also automatically set bookmarks
every time a broadcast is changed. You can jump to each of the book-
marks in succession by pressing a key.
In case of a running time-shift recording (timeshift television), this will
be converted into an archive recording when a blank is set.
PLAY key (press a little bit longer): Set bookmark.
You will see a message on the screen. The drive display is then faded
in and you will see the set bookmark above the bar for the playback.
Automatically set bookmarks are white. Manually
set bookmarks are blue.
Determine cover picture
The covers for the display of the entry in the DR+ archive can be freely
determined by you during an archive replay:
Jump / wind to the desired position in the recording.
PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.
 mark Adopt as cover picture
,
OK confirm.
You will see a message on the screen. The image will
be displayed next to the broadcast in the DR archive
in future.
PLAY key: Resume play.
00:00
38:42
45:00
hh:mm
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
Interval functions
The intervals between manually or automatically set bookmarks
(intervals) can be faded out for future playbacks. In addition to that,
unwanted intervals at the beginning or end of your recorded broadcast
can be deleted.
An archive entry is replayed.
 Show status bar.
Move to the desired interval in the recorded broadcast
by skipping or winding.
PAUSE: Stop play.
 Mark Interval functions
,
OK Call interval functions.
00:00
38:42
45:00
Back
Hide Delete to start Delete to endCancel
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
00:00
38:42
45:00
Back
Hide Delete to start Delete to endCancel
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
Art 40-60
User guide
58
Video
Hiding intervals
The Interval functions are activated.
mark Hide,
OK hide current interval.
This interval will be skipped when the archive entry is
replayed in the future.
Show hidden section again
In
System settings ט Control טmore ...טDR+
טNotify hidden sections ט yes must be selected
.
A screen message will appear when a hidden section is
skipped during replay of a DR+ archive entry.
 Select yes,
OK confirm.
During future replays, the hidden section is displayed
again.
Deleting part of the recording
Press PAUSE key at such a position from which the
recording shall be deleted up to the beginning or to
the end.
Call Interval functions.
 mark Delete to start or Delete to end,
confirm with OK.
 mark Confirm delete
OK Delete part of recording.
00:00
38:42
45:00
hh:mm
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
00:00
38:42
45:00
Back
Hide Delete to start Delete to endCancel
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
00:00
38:42
hh:mm
Deleting intervals
Defined intervals will be deleted when you delete the corresponding
bookmark at the beginning or the end of the interval.
Jumping to Bookmarks
 mark next bookmark
,
OK Jump to next bookmark.
 mark previous bookmark
,
OK Jump to next bookmark.
00:00
38:42
45:00
hh:mm
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
00:00
23:51 45:00
hh:mm
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
Art 40-60
User guide
59
Video
Deleting individual bookmarks
Jump to the manually set bookmark to be deleted.
Press PLAY key for a little bit longer: Delete bookmark.
Deleting the Bookmark during playback
You can delete your manually set bookmarks during the playback of
the DR+ Archive entry.
Manually set bookmarks are blue, automatically set bookmarks are
displayed in grey. Automatically set bookmarks cannot be deleted.
PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.
 mark Delete bookmark
,
OK call delete dialogue.
Delete all
bookmarks
All manually set bookmarks (blue) in the current
recording are deleted.
Delete
bookmark
The manually set bookmark to the left of the current
position will be deleted.
Delete
bookmark
The manually set bookmark to the right of the current
position will be deleted.
OKConfirm selection.
PLAY key: Continue playback.
00:00
23:51 45:00
hh:mm
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
00:00
38:42
45:00
Back
Delete bookmark CancelDelete bookmark Delete all bookmarks
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
Subtitles
Subtitles of a broadcast can also be stored during recording see chap-
ter Extras, section Timer – Entering the Timer data.
Showing recorded subtitles during playback:
 Show status bar.
 mark Settings
,
OK Call settings.
 mark Subtitles,
OK Call up available subtitles.
 Mark the desired subtitles,
OK show/hide subtitles.
Subtitles off Adopt with
OK
German
Here you can display the programme subtitles, if they are
provided.
Art 40-60
User guide
60
Audio/Radio
Audio/Radio
With item Audio/Radio you find music files from your local server(s)
and USB storage media and you access DVB and Internet radio. The
individual subitems are described in detail in the following.
Calling Audio selection
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark Audio/Radio,
OK call list of audio sources.
 Mark function,
OK call.
DVB radio
The TV set can receive digital radio stations over DVB.
For further information see chapter Audio/Radio,
section Radio mode (DVB radio).
Internet radio
The TV set can receive digital radio stations over the
Internet.
For further information see chapter Audio/Radio,
section Radio mode (Internet radio).
MediaNet
Call MediaNet טBrowse טMusic.
Media
Center
A Loewe media centre connected to your home
network.
Twonky-
Media
WMP11
Examples with media servers in your home network.
The exact designation depends on the media server
used.
USB USB storage media on the USB connections of
your TV set. The exact designation depends on the
relevant storage medium.
Please also observe the notes in chapter System
settings, section Control – Software update
regarding USB sticks!
The media sources shown here depend on the
devices available/used.
MediaNet
MediaCenter
TwonkyMedia
WMP11
USB
DVB radio
Internet radio
Audio/Radio Function list
The audio/radio function list contains the individual functions for your
music titles.
MENU: Open function list.
The availability of the following items depends on the currently
marked object (data source, directory, file).
Unmount
Unmount USB data storage medium before remo-
ving it in order to prevent data loss.
Sorting Sort music titles in alphabetical (ascending A-Z or
descending Z-A) order, title number, file size or date
(newest entries first).
Favourite Add music title to the Home favourites.
Settings opens the audio settings.
 Mark desired function,
OK Confirm selection.
Selecting music titles
 Mark desired directory,
OK open directory.
Repeat procedure if necessary.
 Mark desired music title,
OK Start or continue playback of the selected
music title.
......
auch
01 Ist das noch Punkrock?
02 Bettmagnet
03 Sohn der Leere
04 TCR
05 Das darfst du
06 Tamagotchi
07 M&F
08 Freundschaft ist Kunst
09 Angekumpelt
10 Waldspaziergang mit Folgen
11 Fiasko
12 Miststück
13 Das finde ich gut
14 Cpt. Metal
15 Die Hard
16 zeiDverschwÄndung
03:00
03:07
03:42
03:44
03:20
03:06
04:16
03:22
02:34
03:27
02:44
03:39
02:27
04:36
02:20
02:59
Sorting
Favourite
Settings
auch
01 Ist das noch Punkrock?
02 Bettmagnet
03 Sohn der Leere
04 TCR
05 Das darfst du
06 Tamagotchi
07 M&F
08 Freundschaft ist Kunst
09 Angekumpelt
10 Waldspaziergang mit Folgen
11 Fiasko
12 Miststück
13 Das finde ich gut
14 Cpt. Metal
15 Die Hard
16 zeiDverschwÄndung
03:00
03:07
03:42
03:44
03:20
03:06
04:16
03:22
02:34
03:27
02:44
03:39
02:27
04:36
02:20
02:59
......
Art 40-60
User guide
61
Audio/Radio
Audio playback
Description of the symbols in the status display for audio
playback
Symbol Remote
control key
Description
Call list view (select music title / station).
Only for playback of music titles from
USB storage media or from the home
network:
Switch repetition (loop playback) of all
titles of the current directory ON/OFF.
Only for playback of music titles from
USB storage media or from the home
network:
Switch ON/OFF repetition (loop play-
back) of the current title.
Only for playback of music titles from
USB storage media or from the home
network:
Switch shuffle playback for the titles of
the current directory ON/OFF.
Switch off the TV screen.
Add the current station / music title to
the favourites in Home view.
In case of DVB radio:
Show EPG detailed info on the current
broadcast.
For playback of music titles from
USB storage media or from the home
network:
Call detailed info on the played music
titles.
Call function list with audio settings.
Chasing Cars Shut Your EyesHands Open
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
00:00
02:56
04:27
Back
Pause playback
PAUSE key: Stop current playback.
PLAY key: Continue playback.
Wind
You can fast forward music titles at four different speeds. Sound is not
audible during winding.
Press a little bit longer.
With each brief pressing of the speed will increase
until you switch back to the first speed.
Available speeds: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x.
PLAY key: Continue playback.
Chasing Cars Shut Your EyesHands Open
00:00
02:56
04:27
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
Back
Chasing Cars Shut Your EyesHands Open
00:00
02:56
04:27
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
Back
Chasing Cars Shut Your EyesHands Open
00:00
04:10
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
Back
Art 40-60
User guide
62
Audio/Radio
Select another title / play current title from start
BACK: Call music selection.
Select music title as described in chapter Audio/
Radio, section Selecting music titles.
Or:
Press P+ :
Play next title of current album / directory.
Press P– :
Play current title from start.
Press P– again:
Play previous title of the current album / directory.
Or:
 Go to line with music titles,
 scroll in music titles.
OK Start playback of the marked title.
Chasing Cars Shut Your EyesHands Open
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
00:00
02:56
04:27
Back
Repeat
Music titles can be repeated, i.e., replayed in an endless loop.
 Show status bar.
 Mark Repeat title
,
OK Switch the repetition of the individual music title
ON/OFF.
The repeat setting remains until it will be deacti-
vated or another music title is replayed.
Or:
 Mark Repeat all
,
OK Switch repetition of all music titles of the current
directory ON/OFF.
The repeat setting remains until it will be deacti-
vated or another directory in the overview is
selected.
Repeat title and Repeat all cannot be activated simultaneously.
Using one of the two functions deactivates the respective other one.
Repeat and Shuffle (see below) cannot be activated at the same
time. Activating a repeat operation deactivates shuffle.
Shuffle playback
The music titles of your current medium are replayed in random order.
 Show status bar.
 Mark Shuffle playback
,
OK Switch shuffle playback of the titles in current
album / directory ON/OFF.
Repeat and Shuffle (see above) cannot be activated at the same
time. Activating the shuffle playback deactivates repeat.
Art 40-60
User guide
63
Audio/Radio
Switching the screen ON/OFF
Green key: Switch screen OFF.
Or:
 Mark Screen off
,
OK Switch screen off.
Switching off the screen reduces the power
consumption of the TV set.
Switch on the screen with the remote control:
Press green key.
Switch on the screen on the TV set:
Press R on the ring cursor on the TV set.
Ending playback
STOP key: End playback and return to music selec-
tion.
Chasing Cars Shut Your EyesHands Open
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
00:00
02:56
04:27
Back
Art 40-60
User guide
64
Audio/Radio
Radio mode (DVB radio)
The TV set can receive digital radio stations via DVB.
The AUDIO key has been preset for radio operation in the factory.
Radio mode on
AUDIO key on the remote control
Or
Press R on the ring cursor on the TV set.
Or:
HOME: Call Home view.
 Select Audio/Radio,
OK call.
Select DVB radio,
OK call.
You see the radio station list.
Select station,
OK call.
Station switching
The radio mode is switched on and a radio station
has been selected (see above).
P+/P– or press the numerical keys on the remote
control.
Or:
OK call station list.
Select station,
OK call.
3 Bayern 3
2 ANTENNE BAYERN
4 Bayern 1
5 Radio Eins
6 hr1
7 hr2
...
ASTRA1
19,2°E
2 ANTENNE BAYERN
Setting the volume
V+/V– Volume up/down.
Other sound settings are the same as for the volume
setting in TV mode (see chapter TV, section Setting
the volume).
Switching the screen on/off
Green key: Switch screen OFF.
Switching off the screen reduces the power
consumption of the TV set.
Switch on the screen with the remote control:
Press green key.
Switch on the screen on the TV set:
Press R on the ring cursor on the TV set.
DVB radio function list
MENU: Call function list.
Or:
OK call station list,
call function list.
 Mark function,
OK call.
See chapter TV, section Function list for further infor-
mation.
Exit radio mode
AUDIO key or
press TV key on the remote control (TV mode is
called).
Or:
HOME: Call Home view.
 Select another operating mode,
OK call.
Art 40-60
User guide
65
Audio/Radio
Radio mode (Internet radio)
The TV set can receive digital radio stations via the Internet.
The names of the directories and stations in the Internet radio mode
are given by the provider vTuner. Changing the arrangement of sta-
tions or renaming them is not possible here.
Internet radio is only accessible if a connection to the Internet has
been established.
Radio mode on
HOME: Call Home view.
 Select Audio/Radio,
OK call.
Select Internet radio,
OK call.
You see the radio station list.
 Mark desired directory,
OK open directory.
Repeat procedure if necessary.
Select station,
OK call.
For further information on the control of the Internet
radio see chapter Audio/Radio, section Audio
playback.
Station switching
BACK: call station list.
Select stations as described in the left column.
Or:
P+/P– Scroll through the current Internet radio direc-
tory to look for stations.
BuzzBuzz
by Genreby Genre
by Locationby Location
FavoritesFavorites
Local GermanyLocal Germany
New StationsNew Stations
Popular StationsPopular Stations
Recommended StationsRecommended Stations
Internet radio
Setting the volume
V+/V– Volume up/down.
Other sound settings are the same as for the volume
setting in TV mode (see chapter TV, section Setting
the volume).
Switching the screen on/off
Green key: Switch screen OFF.
Or:
 Mark Screen off
,
OK Switch screen off.
Switching off the screen reduces the power
consumption of the TV set.
Switch on the screen with the remote control:
Press green key.
Switch the screen on with the remote control:
Press R on the ring cursor on the TV set.
Internet radio function list
MENU: Call function list.
 Mark function,
OK call.
See chapter TV, section Function list for further infor-
mation.
Exit radio mode
Press TV key on the remote control (TV mode is
called).
Or:
HOME: Calling the Home view.
 Select another operating mode,
OK call.
Internetradio -> Antenne Bayern Classic Rock Live
Antenne Bayern Classic Rock Live
Back
Art 40-60
User guide
66
Photo
Photo
Via menu item Photo you can view photos from your local media and
from online sources on your TV screen. The individual subitems are
described in detail in the following.
Calling Photo selection
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark Photo,
OK call list of photo sources.
 Mark function,
OK call.
MediaNet
Call MediaNet טBrowse טPhoto.
Twonky-
Media
WMP11
Examples with media servers in your home network.
The exact designation depends on the media server
used.
USB USB storage media on the USB connections of
your TV set. The exact designation depends on the
relevant storage medium.
Please also observe the notes in chapter System
settings, section Control – Software update
regarding USB sticks!
The media sources shown here depend on the
devices available/used.
MediaNet
TwonkyMedia
WMP11
USB
Photo function list
The photo function list contains the individual functions for your
photos.
MENU: Open function list.
The availability of the following items depends on the currently
marked object (data source, directory, file).
Unmount
Unmount USB data storage medium before remo-
ving it in order to prevent data loss.
Slide show Start slide show of the photos in the currently se-
lected directory.
See chapter Photo, section Photo display for
further information.
Sorting Sort photos in alphabetical (ascending A-Z or descen-
ding Z-A) order, file size or date (newest entries first).
Favourite Add music title to the Home favourites.
Photo You can apply frequently used picture settings here.
 Mark desired function,
OK Confirm selection.
Selecting a photo
 Mark desired directory,
OK open directory.
Repeat procedure if necessary.
 Mark desired photo,
OK View photo zoomed to full screen.
Slide show
Favourite
Sorting
Photo
Rotate TV
......
Pictures
......
Source: USB1
Title: CRW_7266b
Date: 19.07.2013
Size: 4036 KB
Source: USB1
Title: CRW_7266b
Date: 19.07.2013
Size: 4036 KB
Art 40-60
User guide
67
Photo
Photo display
Description of the symbols in the status display for photos
Symbol
(icon)
Remote
control key
Description
Call list view (select photo).
Rotate photo by 90 degrees to the left.
Rotate photo by 90 degrees to the right.
Start slide show.
Pause current slide show.
short
Show previous photo.
short
Show next photo.
Add currently displayed photo to the
favourites in Home view.
Call detailed info on the displayed photo.
Call function list with photo settings.
USB1 -> CRW_7266b
Back
Full-screen mode
A photo is marked.
OK View photo in full-screen mode.
Show previous / next picture.
Rotating the photo
 On-screen display of status bar.
 Mark
or .
OK rotate photo by 90 degrees to the left/right.
Slide show
PLAY key: Start slide show.
PAUSE key: Pause slide show.
PLAY key: Continue paused slide show.
Photo in full-screen mode / exit slide show
STOP key: Full-screen mode / end slide show and
return to photo selection.
USB1 -> CRW_7266b
Back
USB1 -> CRW_7266b
Back
USB1 -> CRW_7268
Back
Art 40-60
User guide
68
Web
Web
Here you have access to multimedia content in the Internet (MediaNet)
as well as a high-quality web browser.
Calling the Web selection
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark Web,
OK call Web.
 mark function,
OK call.
MediaNet
Under the menu item MediaNet you will find a
continually expanding platform for interactive TV
applications from the Internet.
All applications are optimised for use on the TV.
Browser
Call Web browser of the TV set.
For further information see chapter Web, section
Browser.
Thus you open the Web-APP Portal.
MediaNet
Browser
MediaNet
Call MediaNet
WEB: Call MediaNet
(1
.
or
HOME: Call Home view.
 Select Web,
OK call.
 Mark MediaNet,
call.
T
he upper portion of the MediaNet home screen
contains new online content.
The lower portion of the MediaNet home screen
contains Recommendations given by Loewe.
The given content may change from time to time
without prior notice.
 Select Home,
OK go to the right to choose the online content.
 Mark the desired online content,
OK Display/play content.
The navigation within the various applications
depends on the provider.
Functions in the MediaNet home screen
Home
Moves to the right to choose the online content.
Browse
Under Browse you can list and call the online content
by subjects.
Settings In the Settings for MediaNet you can select coun-
tries, for example, to take advantage of various
services.
Imprint Providing the legally required information on the
parties responsible for the content.
Exit MediaNet
HOME: Call Home view and select another function.
New
Recommendations
MediaNet - Home
Home
Browse
Settings
Imprint
(1
The assignment of these keys can be changed (see chapter System settings, section Control – Web key function).
Art 40-60
User guide
69
Web
MediaNet – Browse
MediaNet-Browse is called.
Under the item Browse, you browse the full range of applications by
topic.
Filtering applications
 Select the genre / topic,
OK call applications of the genre.
 Select desired application,
OK open application.
Change filter
 Go to column with genres / topics.
Select another genre / topic,
OK call applications of the selected genre.
Exit Browse
BACK: Return to the MediaNet home screen.
Or:
 Go to column with genres / topics.
 Select Back,
OK return to the MediaNet home screen.
All
MediaNet - Browse
All
Recommendations
Video
Photo
Service
Games
Entertainment
News
B
ac
k
Games
MediaNet - Browse
Games
Entertainment
News
Sport
Music
S
erv
i
ce
Define application as favourite
 Mark the desired application.
Add the marked application to the Home favourites.
The favourite will be added to Home view and placed
at the end.
MediaNet – Settings
MediaNet settings are called.
Here, you can find setting options for MediaNet.
 Select the desired setting,
OK call.
Country
Selection
Select countries from which you want to get infor-
mation on services (see below).
Imprint
Providing the legally required information on the
parties responsible for the content.
Country Selection
 Mark country,
OK select / deselect country.
Applications from countries that are marked with a tick
here, are offered in MediaNet.
Exit Settings
BACK: Return to the MediaNet home screen.
Or:
 Go to column with settings.
 Select Back,
OK return to the MediaNet home screen.
MediaNet - Country Selection
Select Countries to display various services
Country Selection
Imprint
B
ac
k
Germany Belgium
Austria Netherland
Switzerland Luxemburg
France UK
Italy Denmark
Spain Sweden
Portugal Finland
Art 40-60
User guide
70
Web
Browser
You can access Internet sites directly using the integrated Opera
browser. The web browser can also be used without an Internet
connection. Thus you can access local devices which provide a web
interface (e.g. router, home control, home network server).
Calling the Web browser
HOME: Call Home view.
 Select Web,
OK call.
Select Browser,
OK call.
Start page will be opened.
INFO: display browser status.
Explanation of the symbols in the browser status
Define current site as homepage.
Update the displayed Internet site.
100% Change zoom factor of the displayed site / browser.
Add displayed Web site to Home view (in the Favourites
area).
Navigating on Web sites
P+/P– Scroll page vertically.
/ Scroll page horizontally.
 Select link or text input field,
OK open link or confirm text input.
For the entry of text, press the numerical key (0-9)
repeatedly as with a mobile phone until the desired
character appears. The available letters are printed on
the individual numeric buttons.
BACK: Stop text entry and exit
entry box.
Entering a URL (Internet address)
Browser status is displayed.
 Mark the URL (Internet address) of the
indicated Internet site,
OK Open address entry box.
 Select required character,
OK Adopt character.
In the event of letters with a triangular, additional
letters are displayed when pressing the OK button
longer (2 sec).
Å
Delete character to the left of the cursor.
.-/
The selection switches to special characters.
abc Switch between upper/lower case.
Space Enter blank space.
Delete Delete all characters.
Cancel Cancel input. The entry box will be closed and the
previous Internet site will be displayed again.
Adopt Adopt address and open new Internet site.
The characters may also be entered by the numer-
ical keys of the remote control (see left column).
Exit Browser
HOME: Call Home view and select another function.
q
a
y
1
w
s
x
2
e
d
c
3
r
f
v
4
t
g
b
5
z
h
n
6
u
j
m
7
i
k
.-/
8
o
l
9
P
I
0
ABC
http://www.loewe.de
.com .net . /.dewww.
Enter/change internet address
Back
Adopt Cancel
Delete Cancel AdoptSpace
(2 sec) on a letter with a triangle shows more letters
OK
Art 40-60
User guide
71
Extras
Extras
Extras contains additional functions and settings (e.g., Timer list, CA
module settings).
Call Extras
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark Extras,
OK call Extras.
Explanation of the subitems of Extras
Timer Under the menu item Timer you find the timer list
as well as the timer services such as alarm clock or
time-triggered switch-off of the TV set.
For further information see column on the right.
Software Carry out software update.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Software for further information.
Energy
efficiency
Here you can determine how energy efficient your
TV set shall be.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Energy efficiency for further information.
CA module
[Name]
Make settings for your CA module.
This menu item appears only it at least a CA mod-
ule is plugged in.
The exact designation of the menu item and avail-
able subitems depends on your CA module.
See chapter Extras, section CA module for further
information.
Special
functions
Here, you find the equipment overview of your TV
set and repeat the initial installation. Moreover, you
reset the various settings to the factory settings here.
See chapter Extras, section Special functions for
further information.
Timer
Software
This allows you to open a list which contains all the programmed
timertasks.
Energy effi-
ciency
CA module
Viaccess
CA module
AlphaCrypt
Special func-
tions
Timer
Timer list
All programmed recordings, earmarked programmes and copy jobs
are listed in the timer list.
You can also programme new recordings, earmark other program-
mes and copy pre-recorded programmes from the DR+ archive to an
external USB hard disk by means of the timer list.
When you have programmed timer recordings, the TV set can only
be switched off to the standby mode. Never switch the TV set off
at the mains and do not pull out the plug of the TV set out of the
socket. Otherwise no timer recordings can be made.
After a software update, it is likely that Memos of programmes and
Timer entrys are deleted. After a software update, please check your
timer list.
Call Timer list
Long press: call up the timer list.
Create
newly
Create new timer instruction (recording, copy,
memo).
Explanation of the symbols in the timer list:
Recording
Recording in progress
Marked programme
Repeated recording (daily, weekly or Mon-Fri)
Serial recording
24.09. 10:32 - 11:00 ProSieben How I Met Your Mother
24.09. 12:15 - 12:44 ProSieben Malcolm mittendrin
24.09. 20:15 - 21:15 RTL Television Wer wird Millionär?
25.09. 20:00 - 20:15 Das Erste HD Tagesschau
Timer
Add new
Timer list Timer Services
Mon
Mon
Back
>All entries
Art 40-60
User guide
72
Extras
Timer
New instruction: New recording
In the Timer list:
 Mark Create newly,
OK call.
 Mark New recording,
OK call. The function list for recording will be
opened.
 Mark the desired option,
proceed.
Manual
recording
Programme the recording manually.
For further information see column on the right.
Current
programme
Record currently watched TV programme.
Menu item will only be indicated when EPG data
are available for the current station.
Following
programme
Record following programme.
Menu item will only be indicated when EPG data
are available for the current station.
Recording
via EPG
Programme recording of a programme via the elec-
tronic programme guide (EPG).
Open DR+
archive
opens the DR+ archive.
9
Recording
Current programme
9 ZDF HD 20:15 - 21:45
Toskana
20:15
Following programme
9 ZDF HD 21:45 - 22:10
heute journal
Recording via EPG
Manual
recording
Open DR+ Archive
Thereby you can record the programme currently being
watched.
New recording – Manual recording (current station)
In the Timer list, New recording is selected.
 Mark recording duration.
The selection of a recording duration programmes
always a recording of the currently viewed station.
For Any station and time see below.
OK Call Timer data dialogue.
The selected recording duration is preset in the
timer data. Check timer data and correct them,
if required. In case of a previous selection of
??? Min, enter definitely the recording dura-
tion.
Mark Adopt to Timer.
OK Confirm timer data and adopt timer instruction.
Recording has been started.
New recording – Manual recording (other station)
Manual recording has been selected (see above).
 Mark Any station and time,
OK Call Station selection.
 Mark desired station,
OK Adopt station in timer data.
Check timer data and correct them, if required.
Mark Adopt to Timer.
OK Confirm timer data and adopt timer instruction.
Art 40-60
User guide
73
Extras
Timer
New recording – Current programme
After calling the Current programme the timer data dialogue will be
displayed. The current programme is preset in the timer data.
Check timer data and correct them, if required.
Mark Adopt to Timer.
OK Confirm timer data and adopt timer instruction.
Recording has been started.
New recording – Following programme
After calling the Following programme the timer data dialogue will
be displayed. The following programme of the current station is preset
in the timer data.
Check timer data and correct them, if required.
Mark Adopt to Timer.
OK Confirm timer data and adopt timer instruction.
New copy job
You should copy recordings that you want to save permanently on an
external USB hard disk.
Copying recordings, which originate from a CI Plus encrypted station,
is perhaps not possible or only to a limited extent.
In the Timer list:
 Mark Create newly,
OK call.
 Mark New copy,
OK call.
The DR+ archive will be called. For further information
on copying refer to chapter TV, section Digital-
Recorder.
New memo
You memorise interesting programmes, which have not started yet,
using the electronic programme guide (EPG).
In the Timer list:
 Mark Create newly,
OK call.
 Mark New memo,
OK call.
EPG will be called. For further information on Memorise
refer to chapter TV, section Electronic Programme
Guide.
Record conflict
If you wish to programme a new recording which overlaps a timer
recording already saved, the Recording conflict dialogue will open.
Determine whether one or both recordings are to be made here.
If you decide for both, you have to state which of the two programmes
is to be recorded fully.
BACK: Interrupt programming of the new recording.
Update timer data of the newly programmed
recording.
Delete/change programmed timer instruction
Use this function in the timer list if you want to delete recordings
already programmed, to end a running timer recording or to change
a timer instruction.
The Timer list is displayed.
Mark desired timer instruction,
The text of a currently active timer instruction is red.
If you delete this timer instruction, the recording is
stopped.
OK Change marked timer instruction.
The timer instruction will be displayed.
Or:
STOP: Delete marked timer instruction.
OKConfirm delete.
Timer instruction will be deleted.
24.09. 10:32 - 11:00 ProSieben How I Met Your Mother
24.09. 12:15 - 12:44 ProSieben Malcolm mittendrin
24.09. 20:15 - 21:15 RTL Television Wer wird Millionär?
25.09. 20:00 - 20:15 Das Erste HD Tagesschau
Timer
Timer list Timer Services
Mon
Mon
Back
>All entries
Add new
Change with Delete with
OK
Art 40-60
User guide
74
Extras
Timer
(1
only available if EPG data exists.
Entering the Timer data
After selecting the station you wish to record, timer data will be dis-
played.
The setting options for the timer data differ depending on the recorder
selection, whether an analogue or DVB station is to be recorded or via
which route (EPG, manually) the recording has been programmed.
 Update timer data, if required, or press
OK for confirmation.
If an external DVD recorder was selected as recording source, start
replay at the connected device manually from the beginning of the
entered recording time.
Please also read the instructions in chapter Extras, section CA-
Modul concerning the recording of encoded programmes.
Explanations of the setting options in the menu Timer data-
part1 – Standard settings
Station
(only available when the selected station can be
received via different signal sources, e.g. DVB-T and
DVB-S)
Select the signal source for the recording.
Date
Day of recording.
Beginning
Starting time of the recording.
End
End time of the recording.
Recording
type
Programmes can be recorded in different ways:
Once only: The programme will be recorded at the
specified time.
Mon-Fri: The programme will always be recorded
from Monday to Friday at the specified time.
Daily: The programme will be recorded every day at
the specified time.
Weekly: The programme will be recorded every week
at the specified time.
Serial
(1
: A programme running regularly, but with dif-
ferent start times, can be conveniently programmed.
In this case, the TV set is checking ervery day at the
specified time, whether the programme is available
in the EPG data. If so, the program is recorded, if not,
the next review will be made the following day.
9
DR+
20:15 - 21:45 Tatort: Jagdzeit
101 Das Erste HD
23.07.2012
20:15
21:45
Recorder
Programme
Station
Date
Beginning
End
Recording type
Timer data - Recording
Standard settings
Record station
Additional options
Current programme
101 Das Erste HD 20:15 - 21:45
Tatort: Jagdzeit
20:15
Back
Once only Mon-Fri Daily Weekly Serial
Explanations of the setting options in the menu Timer data-
part 2 – Additional options
Lock
recording
Only allow later playback of this recording after
entering the PIN number (Parental lock).
If a PIN still has not been entered under System
settings ט Control ט Parental lock, the Paren-
tal lock will at first be activated.
Delete
protection
Safeguard the recording from being deleted auto-
matically by using the delete manager.
Auto time
control
(1
Your TV set can use the automatic time control
(Accurate Recording) for recording a programme.
The automatic time control takes control of the
corresponding monitoring of the start and end time
for DVB stations. The recording is started at the be-
ginning of the broadcast and switched off at the end,
even if the start and/or end time have been changed
by the programme provider.
The automatic time control is not supported by
all stations.
If yes is selected and automatic time control is
not supported by the recorded channel then no
recording is made.
If the programme information (Event-ID) should
not be available any more for the recording of a
programmed broadcast. e.g., due to a programme
change or because the Event-ID has been changed
by the station, the programme cannot be recor-
ded. The broadcasters alone are responsible for
the transfer of this data for using automatic time
control. The availability of the appropriate data
cannot be guaranteed by Loewe.
Recording
subtitles
Select whether broadcast subtitles are to be recor-
ded too.
In case of a direct recording the presetting is
taken from System settingsט Control טmore
... טDR+טRecording subtitles.
Favourite
When selecting yes the recording will be added to
the Home favourites.
Art 40-60
User guide
75
Timer Services
This menu offers you convenient alarm services. Programmed alarms
are also active when the TV set has been switched off to standby.
If the TV set is switched on from the standby mode by alarm, a screen
message appears. If this is not confirmed within 5 minutes with the
OK key, the TV set switches automatically off again for safety reasons.
The TV set can also be switched off automatically at certain times. A
screen warning appears one minute before automatic switch off. The
automatic switch off can be interrupted by pressing any key.
Call Timer Services
Pressing long: Call up the timer.
 Mark Timer Services.
Or:
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark Extras,
OK call Extras.
 Mark Timer,
 go to next column.
Mark Timer Services.
Select the desired setting,
OK change.
OK adopt.
Switch off once no yes, at 23:59
Switch off daily no yes, at 23:59
One-time alarm no yes, at 23:59
Wake up Mon-Fri no yes, at 23:59
Wake up Sat no yes, at 23:59
Wake up Sun no yes, at 23:59
Wake up with TV Radio
Wake up signal volume
Timer Iist Timer Services
Back
Timer
Adopt with
OK
Explanations of the setting options in the timer functions
menu:
Switch off
once
The set switches to the standby mode automatically
at the specified time.
If a time is specified which has already passed on
the same day, the set switches off at this time the
next day.
Switch off
daily
The set switches to the standby mode automatically
every day at the specified time.
One time
alarm
The set alerts you once today at the specified time.
If a time was specified which has already passed on
the same day, the alarm is saved for the next day.
Wake up
Mon-Fri
The set regularly alerts you from Monday to Friday
at the set time.
Wake up Sat
The set alerts you regularly every Saturday at the
specified time.
Wake up Sun
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Timer
functions menu.
Wake up with
Specify whether the TV set switches on in the event
of an alarm from the standby mode in TV or Radio
mode with the respectively last active station.
Wake up
signal
volume
Set the desired volume of the alarm tone. The alarm
tone is emitted as a continuous tone as a guide
during the setting.
Extras
Timer
Art 40-60
User guide
76
Conditional Access module (CA module)
In order to receive coded digital stations, a Conditional Access mod-
ule (CA module) and a Smart Card must be inserted in the CI slot of
your TV set.
The CA module and the Smart Card are not part of the set of equip-
ment supplied with the TV set. They are usually available from your
dealer. Loewe does not provide any guarantee for the functioning of
the CA module.
The TV set must first recognise and set up the CA module during initial
operation. Therefore, it can take up to a minute until decoding starts
during initial operation.
Inserting the Smart Card into the CA module
Push the The side of the card with the gold chip on it should be point-
ing towards the thicker side of the insertion slot (see illustration). Note
the direction of the arrow printed on the Smart Card.
Inserting the CA module into the TV set’s CI slot
Switch off TV set using the mains switch.
Remove the cover from the rear of the set.
Insert the CA module carefully into one of the two CI slots, ensuring
that the contact side goes in first. Do not use force. Make sure the
module is not twisted in the process. Push the CA module in as far as
it will go.
Finally, close the side cover.
Smart Card
CA module
Contact side
Searching for scrambled stations
HOME: Call Home view.
 Select System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Stations,
go to next column.
Automatic scan TV+Radio,
go to next column.
Select Change search settings,
OKwizard guides you through the search settings.
Under scrambled stations you have to select yes.
Next select Start search/update,
OK start updating the station list.
Calling CA module information
This menu is only available when a CA module is
plugged in.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark Extras,
OK call Extras.
 Select desired CA module.
The indicated name depends on the inserted
CA module.
go to next column.
 Select CA module,
OK call information.
The content of this menu depends on the provider of
the CA module.
Removing the CA module
Switch off TV set using the mains switch.
Remove the cover from the rear of the set.
Pull the CA module out of the CI slot.
Replace the cover.
Troubleshooting (CA module)
The following information can help, if problems should occur when
running a CA module:
Switch the TV set off to the standby mode. Remove the CA-module
from the TV set. Switch the TV set off completely. Wait a few seconds.
Reinsert the CA module. Switch the TV set on again.
If errors continue to occur, make a note of the displayed two-digit
error code (only possible for CI Plus capable CA modules) and contact
your dealer.
Extras
CA module
Art 40-60
User guide
77
Extras
CA module / DR+ Streaming
DVB Common Interface Standard (CI)
Selection possibilities in the CA module menu and performance ca-
pability of your CA module depend on the type of module used and
the software installed on it. Consult the manufacturer of the module
if you have any questions.
DVB Common Interface Plus Standard (CI
Plus)
CI Plus is an advanced development of the DVB Common Interface
Standard. CI Plus slots are in principle downward compatible to the
previous CI standard, i.e. CA modules and Smart Cards according to
the past CI standard can continue to be used in CI Plus slots, as far as
the programme provider permits this.
Programme providers, who use the CI Plus standard, can assign
different rights for their broadcast programmes. For instance, the
programme provider can restrict or completely prevent recording or
later watching of an encoded programme. If there are such regulations,
these also apply to time-shifted watching of television programmes.
A screen message informs you of this fact, if you would like to record
such a programme. Recording is carried out in such a case (an ap-
propriate entry is displayed in the DR+ archive), later watching of the
programme is however not possible at all or only for a limited period
(e.g., 10 days). A possible time limitation of the playback will also ap-
pear in the corresponding entry in the DR+ archive.
All restrictions mentioned here are the responsibilities of the broad-
caster. The TV set simply values the broadcaster set signalling as
neutral.
Furthermore, the programme provider can prevent external copying
of protected programmes.
It could be necessary to enter the parental protection PIN of the CA
module when programming the data, if you want to record a CI Plus
protected programme, which has been protected against viewing by
minors. The Parental lock PIN can also be store in the TV set. The secret
number of the TV set is required for watching the programme later.
The appearance of the CA module menu depends on the manufacturer
of the module.
Software update for CI Plus capable CA modules
Every now and then, there will be new system software for your CA
module software. There are two software update types.
Recommended update:
Information on an available update is displayed. You can either run this
or cancel the procedure. If you do not install the update, the information
will reappear in regular intervals until the update has been installed.
Forced update:
Information on an available update is displayed. The module does not
decode any more until the update has been successfully implemented.
Art 40-60
User guide
78
Extras
Special functions
Special functions
Calling special functions
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark Extras,
OK call Extras.
 Mark Special functions,
go to next column.
Select desired function,
proceed to next column.
Explanations of the setting options in the Special functions
menu:
Integrated
features
See right-hand column.
Repeat initial
installation
You can repeat the Initial installation again at any
time. You are guided through the various menus
where i.a. an automatic TV/radio station search is
automatically carried.
Caution: All stored stations and all created personal
lists will be deleted by this!
If a parental lock is activated, the access code must
be entered before repeating initial installation.
Reset to
factory
settings
Reset the settings of Picture/Sound, Speaker system
or Network to factory settings.
Special
functions
Integrated
features
Repeat initial
installation
Reset to
Here you can obtain information on the integrated
features of your TV set.
Integrated features
Here you can obtain information on the integrated features of the
TV set.
See the rating plate on the rear of the set for the precise product
designation.
Call Integrated features
HOME: Calling the Home view.
 Mark Extras,
OK call Extras.
 Mark Special functions,
go to next column.
 Mark Integrated features,
OK call Integrated features.
 Scroll content up/down.
Integrated
features
Manufacturer LOEWE
Serial number 834
Article number 52437W85
Chassis SL210
Software 10.2.2.6
CI Plus PRODUCTION
Nicam
Channel 1 A/T/T2/C/S/S2
Wi-Fi module
MAC adress (TV) 00:09:82:d0:04:39
MAC adress (Wi-Fi) 20:10:7a:de:02:eb
Integrated features
Back
Here you can obtain information on the integrated features of your TV set.
Move content up and down with the cursor
Art 40-60
User guide
79
System settings
System settings
Under the menu item System settings in the Home menu you find
all settings and adaptabilities of your TV set. These are explained to
you more in detail as follows.
Calling System settings
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call.
Or:
Press MENU key longer: call System settings.
Explanations of the setting options:
Picture
Here you do the settings referring to the representa-
tion of the picture signal on your TV set.
See chapter System settings, section Picture for
further information.
Sound
Under this menu item you find the settings for sound
playback.
The subitems of the menu depend on the currently
selected sound component.
See chapter System settings, section Sound for
further information.
Stations
Move and delete TV and radio stations. In addition
to that you can automatically and manually update
the complete station list. Your stations can also be
arranged and optionally sorted in personal lists.
See chapter System settings, section Stations
for further information.
Control
In this menu you find settings for additional functions
of your TV set like picture in picture (PIP) and digital
recorder (DR+) as well as interfunctional settings
like time and date, parental lock or software update.
See chapter System settings, section Control for
further information.
Multimedia /
Network
By means of the Multimedia / Network menu you
configure your network adaptor and network access.
Moreover, you can make settings for video and music
playback here.
See chapter System settings, section Multime-
dia/Network for further information.
Connections
Using this menu you configure external devices that
are connected to one of the numerous connections
of the TV set.
See chapter System settings, section Connec-
tions for further information.
Picture
Sound
Station
Control
Connections
Multimedia
/ Network
Here you can adjust among other things: Contrast, colour,
brightness, picture adjustment, sharpness, picture format.
Art 40-60
User guide
80
System settings
Picture
Picture
Here you do the settings referring to the representation of the picture
signal on your TV set.
Calling picture settings
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Picture,
go to next column.
Select desired picture function,
 proceed to next column.
Explanations of the picture settings:
3D
Do the settings for your TV set‘s 3D display.
Picture
adjustment
You can switch between three preset picture settings
and the three personal picture values that you have
adjusted.
Contrast
The contrast setting depends on the brightness of
the room. The brighter the surroundings the higher
the contrast should be set.
The power consumption of the TV set depends
directly on the value set here.
Brightness
Set the brightness so that the black areas of the
picture only just appear black.
Colour
intensity
Set the colour intensity to suit your personal taste.
Image
+
Active
Picture enhancement on/off.
Picture
format
Set picture format.
more ...
call with OK (see right-hand column).
Picture
3D
Picture ad-
justment
Contrast
Brightness
Colour in-
ten
Image+
Active
Picture for-
mat
more ...
If your desired display format has not been automatically
selected then you can choose it in the 3D settings menu.
You may display the 3D image in 2D or vice versavice versa.
Explanations of the picture settings (continuation):
Colour
temperature
Here, you can give the TV picture a warmer or colder
hue according to your personal taste.
Sharpness
Here you can adjust picture sharpness to obtain the
best definition.
Move picture
up/down
When using the TV aspect ratios Panorama or Zoom,
the text or graphic displays at the top and bottom are
not or only partially visible. You can move the picture
up or down with the up/down menu control keys to
make the displays visible.
Auto
dimming
depending on video (VBD+):
The background lighting is reduced depending on
the current video content and the video signal is
simultaneously amplified in order to get an improved
contrast of your TV picture.
depending on the environment (OPC):
The contrast of your TV picture is automatically
reduced vs. decreasing room brightness (Optical
Power Control – OPC).
The automatic dimming also results in a lower
power consumption of the TV set.
Due to a reduction in the luminance in 3D mode
for technical reasons, this function is deactivated
when showing 3D content.
Film quality
improvement
(DMM)
DMM reduces jolt in rapid picture object movements
and rolling text displays. This applies especially for
movies.
Digital Noise
Control (DNC)
With active DNC (Digital Noise Control) you can
eliminate or reduce picture noise.
Skin tone Adjust the skin tone so that the most natural facial
skin colour is achieved.
Deblocking
filter
To minimise the visible interference to the picture
caused by modern compression methods for images
and image sequences (formation of small blocks),
a so-called deblocking filter can be activated which
counteracts this interference.
PC IN
display
For some PC image formats, horizontal as well as
vertical position and the phase position of the image
can be corrected.
Art 40-60
User guide
81
System settings
Picture
Picture adjustment
By selecting one of the three presets (Home Mode, Premium Mode
or Shop Mode), the picture settings for whichever signal input group
that is currently active will be set to predefined settings.
You can use Personal Mode to specify individual settings for contrast,
colour intensity, colour temperature, sharpness and digital noise sup-
pression. Here you can enter your own specifications for each signal
input group.
Calling picture adjustment
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Picture,
go to next column.
 Mark Picture adjustment,
go to next column.
 Select mode,
OK adopt selected mode.
When selecting one of the three preset picture
adjustment modes you have to specify additionally
if the mode shall be set only for the currently
selected signal source, e.g., Only for HD Digital or
for the entire TV.
Explanations of the picture adjustment modes:
Home Mode
The emphasis for the picture settings is here on low
energy consumption for home use. In this case, the
TV set switches automatically off after 4 hours of
unattended time.
Premium
Mode
The picture settings in Premium Mode are optimised
for a brighter environment at the cost of higher en-
ergy consumption.
Shop Mode
The picture settings in Shop Mode are adjusted to
operation in the presentation room.
Personal
Mode
Here, you can recall your last personal picture set-
tings.
...
Picture ad-
justment
Home Mode
Premium
Mode
Shop Mode
Personal
Mode
The priority here is low energy consumption in home use.
In this case the TV switches off automitically for the sake
of saving energy, after it has been out of operation for four
hours.
Adopt with Adopt with
OK
Selecting the picture format
The setting options depend on the transmitted picture content.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Picture,
go to next column.
 Mark Picture format,
go to next column.
 Select format,
OK adopt selected format.
Explanations of the picture formats for HD signals:
4:3 TV
16:9 TV
Proportionally correct display of 4:3 or 16:9 broad-
casts. You select this mode when the signal is not
supplied by a PC (normal case). A small part of the
picture is truncated. This may be necessary to hide
possible interference at the edge of the picture,
which arises from the signal supplied.
16:9 PC
16:9 PC
Proportionally correct display of 4:3 or 16:9 broad-
casts without loss of information.
You select this mode when the signal is supplied
by a PC.
4:3 Zoom
16:9 Zoom
Proportionally correct display. Maximum picture
magnification. Displayed text may get lost.
Explanations of the picture formats for SD signals:
16:9 Proportionally correct display of 16:9 broadcasts.
4:3 Proportionally correct display of 4:3 broadcasts.
Panorama 1 Proportionally correct display of 4:3 broadcasts on
the 16:9 screen. Station logo and subtitles remain
visible.
Panorama 2 Format filling display (factory default) of 4:3 broad-
casts on the 16:9 screen. Station logo and subtitles
remain visible.
Zoom Proportionally correct display. Maximum picture
magnification. Displayed text may get lost.
PALplus Is a 4:3-compatible 16:9 picture broadcast supplied
by the station which is detected automatically.
...
Picture for-
mat
16:9 TV
16:9 PC
16:9 Zoom
4:3 TV
4:3 PC
4:3 Zoom
This 16:9 TV mode enables a proportionally correct display
of 16:9 pictures. You select this mode when the picture
signal is not supplied by a PC (normal case).
Art 40-60
User guide
82
System settings
Picture
3D function
You can use the 3D functionality of your TV set to display 3D material
transmitted by a channel or from an external player that is connected.
You require a pair of Loewe Active Glasses 3D to be able to use the
3D functionality in its entirety (see chapter Accessories). Please read
the operating instructions included with the 3D glasses.
3D settings
Using the 3D settings you can select the correct display format,
should this not have been detected automatically. What’s more, you
can choose to view 3D material in 2D or “traditional” 2D material in 3D.
For 3D content that is being played back from an external HDMI player,
the 3D display format is normally recognised correctly when the fac-
tory setting 3D mode טAutomatic is selected. You may need to set
the 3D mode manually to view 3D content from broadcasters.
Owing to a reduction in the luminance in 3D mode for technical
reasons,
Auto-dimming - Room
and
Auto-Dimming- Video (VBD+)
are deactivated when 3D contents is displayed.
If the TV set is operated with the remote control during a 3D play-
back, flicker effects can occur in the 3D glasses when doing this.
Calling 3D settings
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Picture,
go to next column.
 Mark 3D,
go to next column.
 Select settings,
OK adopt.
...
3D
3D
Back
With this you can select the correct display format, should this not be recognised automatically, or you can deactivate
the 3D mode.
3D->2D
2D->3D
3D mode
3D->2D
2D->3D
3D mode
Automatic side by side top/bottom
off on
off on
Explanations of the 3D settings:
3D->2D
off/on
If you set 3D->2D to on, the 3D material from TV sta-
tions as well as from external players will be changed
into 2D and played back. The three dimensional (3D)
effect will disappear. You will not need to wear the 3D
glasses to view it properly.
2D->3D
off/on
If you set 2D->3D to on, all 2D image material will be
displayed in 3D. You will need to wear the 3D glasses
to view it properly.
3D mode
Automatic
If the TV is set to this setting (factory setting), then
the TV set automatically switches over to the correct
3D mode, if this is possible and supported by the
broadcaster.
Only change the setting if the 3D content is not dis-
played correctly.
side by side
To display 3D content in side by side format. When
viewing 3D content with this setting, two almost
identical images are displayed next to each other
and put together correctly by the TV set.
The 3D mode is Automatic reset the next time you
switch on the TV set.
top/bottom
To display 3D content in top/bottom format. When
viewing 3D content with this option, two almost iden-
tical images are displayed one above the other and
put together correctly by the TV set.
The 3D mode is Automatic reset the next time you
switch on the TV set.
Art 40-60
User guide
83
System settings
Picture
Picture format / 3D mode
If 3D contents are recognised by the TV device, the picture format
cannot be subsequently changed. The picture format when in 3D
operation is always 16:9 PC.
Instruction / Symbol
If 3D content is detected by the TV set, a corresponding message
appears. The instruction text will disappear after the display time
has elapsed.
In the status display, 3D content is indicated by an icon.
The following images will
be displayed in 3D mode.
For this part, put the 3D
glasses on and then
switch them on. Viewing
3D images for extended
periods of time can tire
out the eyes and/or cause
feelings of dizziness.
Digital 2
20:42 21.01.2013
125 ASTRA 3D
20:15 - 21:00 ASTRA 3D Demo
21:00 - 21:45 ASTRA 3D Demo
Art 40-60
User guide
84
System settings
Sound
Sound
Calling the sound settings
The selectable menu items depend on the selected station and the
connected sound components.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Sound,
go to next column.
Select sound function,
 proceed to next column.
Explanations of the sound settings:
Sound via Playback over the TV speakers or an external hi-fi
amplifier.
The menu item Sound via only appears if HiFi/
AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable) is set
in the audio components wizard (see Kapitel Sys-
tem settings, section Connections – Sound
components).
Sound
adjustment
Here, you can adapt preset sound characteristics
of the respective broadcast. Selectable are, e.g.,
Speech, Classical, Pop, Custom music and Film
soundtracks. For personal music and film sound you
can do the settings for pitch and bass sound (high
and low frequencies).
Audio
commentary
volume
Set the volume of the audio commentary to be
relative to the volume of the programme being
transmitted.
Should negative values result (those in the area of
-50-1), the audio commentary is quieter than the
programme sound. Should positive values result
(those in the area of +1+50), the audio commen-
tary is louder than the programme sound. If the
value 0 results, then the audio commentary is at the
exactly the same volume as the programme sound.
The menu item only appears if audio commentary
is activated (see chapter System settings, sec-
tion Control – DVB settings) and is offered by
the current station.
Additionally, the Loudspeaker sound or Head-
phone sound must be set to normal + audio
commentary must be switched on (see next page).
Loudness
Proper boost of bass and treble tones at low volume.
Sound
Sound modeSound mode
Sound
adjustment
Sound
adjustment
Volume ad-
justment
Volume ad-
justment
LoudnessLoudness
more ...
Possible sound formats depend on the number of channels
available in the received audio signal. If more audio
channels are supplied than the number of speakers available
then you can create a pseudo mode by selecting the speaker
number which is contained within brackets. If you select
“optimal” then the number of speaker used will automatically,
if possible, match the number of audio channels received, this
normally gives the best sound quality. If a sub woofer is
connected it is always active unless you select mono mode i.e
a single speaker.
5܃= playback of front, surround and centre sound
4܃= playback of front and surround sound
3܃= playback of front and centre sound
2܃= playback of front sound
1܃= playback of external centre sound or mono (left/right)
Amplifier ܃= playback via HiFi/AV amplifier
Souond pic-
Explanations of the sound settings (continued):
Sound
picture
synchronisa
-
tion
If the sound and picture are not precisely in sync,
you may correct this here. Move the mark on the
bar downwards, slowing down the sound compared
with the picture. Move the mark upwards, speeding
it up compared with the picture. Time adjustment
of the sound occurs in steps of 10 ms in each case.
only available for DVB stations.
Volume
adjustment
The volume can differ according to the individual
stations. If the sound is too loud or too quiet in rela-
tion to other stations, adjust the volume. When the
menu is open, you can select the stations one after
another with P+/P– and adjust every single station
conveniently.
more ...
call with OK.
Loudspeaker/
Headphone
sound
For analogue stations:
Selection options for Mono/ Stereo or Sound 1 or
Sound 2 for bilingual programmes, separately for
the loudspeakers and the headphones.
For DVB channels:
You can choose here if you wish to listen to a special
soundtrack for the visually impaired over the speak-
ers. This soundtrack uses an audio commentary to
describe the action taking place on-screen.
The menu item only appears if an audio commen-
tary is offered by the current channel.
Auto volume
The volume may vary when receiving stations with
different standards, when switching from station to
station or during commercials.
You can reduce these differences in volume by
selecting auto volume on. For music and live broad-
casts you get a better sound spectrum with auto
volume off.
AV
output signal
You can indicate here which sound is output via the
AV socket for dual sound programmes: Sound 1 (e.g.
main language), sound 2 (e.g. foreign language), or
sound 1+2 (both simultaneously).
Maximum
volume
You can limit the volume adjustment of the loud-
speakers. This prevents selecting a volume which
is too loud.
Maximum
switch on
volume
Set the sound level to be heard after switching on the
TV set with the mains switch or after a power failure.
When switching on the TV set in standby mode, the
volume last used is retained unless it was above this
switch-on level. Otherwise it is limited by this.
Balance
Set stereo balance so that the volume impression is
identical on the left and right.
Auto speech
detection
If the automatic speech detection is activated,
the sound of the current programme is automati-
cally output with optimum comprehensibility when
speech is detected.
Art 40-60
User guide
85
System settings
Stations
Stations
Under the item Stations you find all settings concerned with station
search for TV and DVB radio as well as functions for creating and
editing the various station lists.
Station management is not possible as long as a programmed timer
recording is active.
If at least one station is locked, the access code must be entered
prior to automatic search
.
The procedure for radio stations or Station lists Radio is similar to
that for TV stations or Station lists TV. Therefore, this procedure is
described only for TV stations.
Call Stations menu
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Stations,
go to next column.
Select desired function,
 proceed to next column.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Stations menu:
Automatic
scan
TV+Radio
Here you start the wizard that searches and stores
all TV and DVB radio stations.
Manual scan
TV
Here, you can enter all the settings available for a
TV station.
Manual scan
Radio
Here, you can enter all the settings available for a
DVB radio station.
Station lists
TV
Here you can move and delete TV stations in all
lists. You can put together your most frequently
watched programmes in one or more lists of per-
sonal favourites.
Station lists
Radio
Here you can move and delete DVB radio stations in
all lists. You can put together your most frequently
watched programmes in one or more lists of perso-
nal favourites.
Update
station list
automatically
If the channel list is not up to date, it will be updated
automatically, provided the parameter Allow is
selected.
Stations
Manual scan
Radio (incl.
Station lists
TV
Station lists
Radio
In this mode you open a wizard which automatically
searches and saves all the TV and radio stations. Please
follow the instructions in the dialogues below.
Update
Art 40-60
User guide
86
Automatic scan TV+Radio
For automatic scan TV+Radio, a search wizard will be started that
searches for new stations which are not yet stored.
You have to repeat the initial installation and auto-
matically search for new stations if you want to delete
all the existing stations and automatically search for
new ones.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Stations,
go to next column.
Mark Automatic scan TV+Radio,
go to next column.
In the upper info text the current search settings will
now be displayed:
If you want to change these search settings:
 Select Change search settings,
OKwizard guides you through the search settings
(see column on the right).
If you agree with these settings:
 Select Start search/update,
OKstart scan.
BACK: Cancel current search/update.
Explanations of some search settings:
Age-related
lock
You can specify an age limit for your TV set here.
DVB broadcasts that have an appropriate age iden-
tification are locked and can only be watched after
entering the access code.
Signal source
Select cable (analogue), DVB-T, DVB-C or DVB-S
depending on which signal source you want to search
for new stations.
Use the Antenna wizard to call the configuration of
the DVB-T and DVB-S antennas.
Calling up the DVB antenna configuration causes
the Change search settings dialogue to be quit.
You must call up the dialogue again after finishing
the configuration.
Cable
(analogue)
TV/colour
standard
With the selection of TV set location the conven-
tional TV standard/colour standard is the default.
This should only be changed if stations with other
standards are to be searched.
......
Your TV carries out the update of the station list (search for new stations; delete
stations no longer broadcast) with the following settings:
Location of TV set D Germany
Signal source Cable analogue
Change search settings Start search/update
SEARCH WIZARD - Check search settings
End with
Explanations of some search settings (continued):
DVB-T/C/S
Network
selection
If several networks are available, you can decide
which network you want to receive your channels
from.
DVB-T/C/S
Settings
With the selection of set location the conventional
settings will be preset. Only change these defaults
if you are familiar with other parameters.
Scrambled stations:
(DVB-T/C/S)
You can state whether scrambled stations are to be
searched for in the search/update. If you select yes,
coded stations will also be searched for. However,
these stations can only be received in connection
with a CA module and the appropriate Smart Card.
Ask your dealer which Smart Card you need to re-
ceive certain stations.
Search method: (DVB-T)
If you want to run the station search independently
of the channel grid, select Frequency search for
the search method.
Search method: (DVB-C)
If you select Frequency search here, a search is
performed for all receivable stations. With Network
search, only the stations which the networks sup-
ply are searched - either for all receivable networks
or only for the particular network specified under
Network ID.
Network ID: (DVB-C)
If you select none here, DVB signals of all current
broadcasting networks are scanned automatically
(recommended for most cable networks).
If, on the other hand, you specify a certain network ID
(necessary in the cable networks of some countries),
only DVB signals of this broadcasting network are
searched for automatically. Your cable provider has
the information you need.
Search method: (DVB-S)
If you select Frequency search here, a search is
performed for all receivable stations. With Network
search, from all receivable networks all the stations
are searched which are supplied by these networks.
Accept Logical Channel Number: (DVB-T/C/S)
In various countries, digital stations (DVB-T/C/S) are
transmitted with a preset channel number per
station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).
If you select yes here, these default channel slots
will be used and the channels of the preferred signal
source will be sorted as per LCN. The stations in the
station list can no longer be shifted.
System settings
Stations
Art 40-60
User guide
87
System settings
Stations
Search for/update stations – handling of new and no longer
found stations
The number of new TV stations found is displayed after the automatic
search / update has been completed.
Proceed. The number of new radio stations found
is displayed.
Call list of new TV stations found.
 Select station.
OK Mark / unmark station.
stores the marked TV stations. The list of new radio
stations found is displayed.
 Select station.
OK Mark / unmark station.
Proceed.
Afterwards, a list of the stations which are saved but
which are temporarily not broadcasting or no longer
exist is displayed, if available.
The number of the memory location used is displayed
in front of the station. Please select the stations you
really want to delete.
 Select station.
OK Mark / unmark station.
Proceed. The marked stations will be deleted. The
list of radio stations no longer found is displayed.
 Select station.
OK Mark / unmark station.
End search wizard.
...
All newly found TV stations which are marked with a are then saved. With the
button, you can set or remove the marking.
Note: The newly found stations which you have already deleted are not marked.
Newly found stations
Proceed with
OK
3sat HD ANDALUCÍA TV arte
a.tv ANIMAX ARTE
Achtung Singles TV ANIXE HD ARTE Francais
Aktiv Direkt TV anixe iTV ARTE HD
Al Jazeera ANIXE SD Astrocanal TV
Al Jazeera English ARD Astro TV
Amore TV ARIRANG TV ATV+
...
The following stored TV stations were no longer found because they are not currently
broadcasting a programme or no longer exist. All TV stations marked with a are
subsequently deleted. The unmarked stations are retained.
You can set or remove the marking with the button.
Stations no longer found (TV)
Proceed with
Channel TV Press TV
Direct 3 iM1
Direct 4
Direct 5
GoTV
ATV+
BVN
OK
Manual Scan TV / Radio
Here, you can enter all the settings available for a station. However,
this requires detailed knowledge.
The manual search of radio stations is similar to that of TV sta-
tions. Therefore, the manual search for radio station is not dealt
with separately.
Calling manual search
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Stations,
go to next column.
Mark Manual Scan TV,
OKcall Manual Scan.
Select the menu item Signal source to decide in which
area you want to search for stations.
Depending on the selected source, various setting
possibilities will be available.
On the next page, the settings for analogue cable and
DVB-T/C/S sources are described separately.
Status bar for manual search
Status bars are displayed for manual search, which
show the reception quality of the individual stations
during the station scan. The markers in all bars should
preferably be in the green area.
C/N: (Carrier/Noise) The bar shows the signal-to-
noise ratio. The value indicated in dB should be prefer-
ably high.
Level: The bar shows the receiving level of the station.
The value displayed in dBμV should be preferably high.
BER: (Bit Error Rate) The bar shows the bit error rate
of the station. The value for BER should be as low as
possible.
...
Signal source Cable analog DVB-T DVB-C DVB-S
TV standard B/G I L D/K M
Colour standard PAL SECAM
Channel E 01 S 01
Frequency 044.00 MHz
Name
C/N 40.5 dB
Level 54 dBμV
Signal source Cable analog DVB-T DVB-C DVB-S
TV standard B/G I L D/K M
Colour standard PAL SECAM
Channel E 01 S 01
Frequency 044.00 MHz
Name
C/N 40.5 dB
Level 54 dBμV
Manual TV scan (incl. antenna status)
Here, you can enter all the settings available for a station. However, this requires detailed knowledge.
Search
Back
Station name
C/N 71.5 dB
Level 58 dBμV
BER 0 E-7
Art 40-60
User guide
88
System settings
Stations
Manual search for cable analogue (analogue cable reception):
Manual search is called.
Cable analogue has been selected as signal source.
 Mark and adjust settings,
OK confirm as the case may be.
 Mark Search,
OK start search.
If a station has been found:
 Mark Store/Overwrite,
OK store station.
Explanations on the search settings for cable analogue:
Signal source Selection of range in which you want to search for the
station.
TV standard
If necessary, ask your dealer which standard to se-
lect for specific channels or AV equipment.
Colour
standard
If necessary, ask your dealer which standard to se-
lect for specific channels or AV equipment.
Channel
Direct input of channel.
Frequency
Direct input of station frequency.
Range for entry: 044.75 MHz - 859.25 MHz.
Name
Here, the name of the found station is displayed. You
can change the name of the station.
...
Signal source Cable analog DVB-T DVB-C DVB-S
TV standard B/G I L D/K M
Colour standard PAL SECAM
Channel E 01 S 01
Frequency 044.00 MHz
Name
C/N 40.5 dB
Level 54 dBμV
Signal source Cable analog DVB-T DVB-C DVB-S
TV standard B/G I L D/K M
Colour standard PAL SECAM
Channel E 01 S 01
Frequency 044.00 MHz
Name
C/N 40.5 dB
Level 54 dBμV
Manual TV scan (incl. antenna status)
Here, you can enter all the settings available for a station. However, this requires detailed knowledge.
Search
Back
Manual DVB-T/C/S search:
Manual search is called.
 Mark and adjust settings,
OK confirm as the case may be.
 Mark Search,
OK start search.
When a DVB transponder has been found:
 Mark the station,
OK Station will be ticked with
. If necessary,
repeat for several stations.
Stations that already exist in the station overview
will be displayed with their station number on the
left.
 Mark Store/Overwrite,
OK Stations marked with
will be stored.
Explanations of some search settings:
Signal
source
(DVB-T/C/S)
Selection of range in which you want to search for the
station.
Channel
(DVB-T)
Direct input of channel.
Satellite
(DVB-S)
Here you can select the satellite where the stations
are to be searched for.
Band
(DVB-S)
Here you can select the frequency band in which
shall be searched.
Setting ranges: horiz/low 10694 - 11906 MHz
horiz/high 11544 - 12756 MHz
vert/low 10694 - 11906 MHz
vert/high 11544 - 12756 MHz
Frequency
(DVB-T/C/S)
DVB-T/C: Direct input of station frequency.
DVB-S: Direct input of LNC frequency
Symbol rate
(DVB-S)
Here you can specify the symbol rate
Range: 1000-45000
...
Signal source Cable analog DVB-T DVB-C DVB-S
Frequency 044.00 MHz
QAM modualtion 16
Symbol rate 22000
Netzwork Standard
Station name
C/N 71.5 dB
Level 58 dBμV
BER 0 E-7
Search
Back
Manual TV scan (incl. antenna status)
Here, you can enter all the settings available for a station. However, this requires detailed knowledge.
...
1024 arte HD
1025 kabel eins HD
1026 SPORT1 HD
1027 Cartoon Network
1028 Spiegel TV HD
1024 arte HD
1025 kabel eins HD
1026 SPORT1 HD
1027 Cartoon Network
1028 Spiegel TV HD
Found stations
Search Store/Overwrite
Mark/unmark with
OK
Back
Art 40-60
User guide
89
System settings
Stations
Station lists TV / Radio
Under the menu item Station lists TV or Station lists Radio you
can edit (delete block, move block, restore deleted stations) various
lists, e.g., DVB-T, ASTRA LCN, DVB-C, etc. You can also create and
edit new Personal lists.
The function of Station lists Radio is similar to that of Station lists
TV. Therefore, editing of Station lists Radio will not be dealt with
separately.
Change station list
If at least one station is locked, the access code must
be entered before changing stations
.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call system settings.
 Mark Stations,
go to next column.
 Select Station lists TV,
go to next column.
 Mark desired station list,
call list.
Here, you can delete and move station blocks as well
as restore deleted stations.
The following section describes how to proceed if you
wish to Delete block, Move block and Restore
stations.
Delete block
 Select Delete Block,
move to list.
 Select beginning of block,
OK mark beginning of block.
 Select end of block,
OK mark end of block (selected stations are coloured
blue).
 Select Execute delete,
OK block will be deleted, or
 select Cancel procedure,
OK cancel delete.
19 Z
20 Z
21 Z
22 S
23 R
24 P
25 H
26 S
27 N
10 Das Erste
11 ZDF
12 arte
13 RTL HD
14 SAT.1 HD
15 ProSieben HD
16 VOX HD
17 kabel eins HD
18 Super RTL HD
1 Das Erste HD
2 ZDF HD
3 RTL
4 SAT.1
5 ProSieben
6 VOX
7 kabel eins
8 arte HD
9 Super RTL
ASTRA LCN
DVB-C
DVB-T
...
ASTRA LCN
New
personal list
Back
Delete block Move block Restore stations
Here you can move stations around in all the lists, delete stations and restore stations you have previously deleted. You
can edit frequently-used stations in one or more personal lists.
Move block / Change order
Stations with LCN cannot be reordered. In this case,
the function Move block is hidden.
 Select Move block,
move to list.
 Select beginning of block,
OK mark beginning of block.
 Select end of block,
OK mark end of block (selected stations are coloured
blue).
 Select insert position,
OK Confirm insert position.
 Select Execute move,
OK block will be moved, or
 select Cancel procedure,
OK cancel move.
Restore stations
 Select Restore stations,
move to list.
 Select beginning of block,
OK mark beginning of block.
 Select end of block,
OK mark end of block (selected stations are coloured
blue).
 Select Restore stations,
OK stations will be added again to the station list, or
 select Cancel procedure,
OK cancel restore.
19 Z
20 Z
21 Z
22 S
23 R
24 P
25 H
26 S
27 N
10 Das Erste
11 ZDF
12 arte
13 RTL HD
14 SAT.1 HD
15 ProSieben HD
16 VOX HD
17 kabel eins HD
18 Super RTL HD
1 Das Erste HD
2 ZDF HD
3 RTL
4 SAT.1
5 ProSieben
6 VOX
7 kabel eins
8 arte HD
9 Super RTL
...
ASTRA LCN
DVB-C
DVB-T
ASTRA LCN
Back
Delete range Move range Restore stations Delete list
Cancel process Execute move
New
personal list
Art 40-60
User guide
90
System settings
Stations
Compose / edit Personal list
Each personal list can contain up to 99 stations. You can compose the
personal lists to suit your convenience (e.g., topic lists). Other persons
using this TV set can create their own personal lists. You can create
up to six personal lists.
Creating and updating personal station lists is not possible as long
as a programmed timer recording is active.
Create / edit New personal list
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Stations,
go to next column.
 Mark Station lists TV,
go to next column.
 Mark New personal list,
OKNew personal list x will be created.
x stands for the number of the personal list.
The number depends on how many list were
already created.

Mark the station in the station list which is to be
added to the personal list.
OK adds the station to the personal list.
The new station will be added at the end of the
personal list. Proceed in the same way with addi-
tional stations.
Call up additional options.
ASTRA LCN
DVB-T
DVB-C
Examples of station lists. Select the station list from
which you add stations to the personal list. In the per
-
sonal list you can store stations from different sources.
Sorting The sorting procedure for the source station list may
be changed between numerical and alphabetical.
BACK: Store and close station list.
...
14 ProSieben
13 n-tv
1 SAT.1
2 ZDF HD
3 BR Nord HD
4 3sat HD
5 ZDF Neo HD
15 3sat HD
16 ARTE HD
17 EinsPlus
18 Eurosport
19 ZDF Neo HD
20 ZDF.kultur
ASTRA1
19,2°E
Personal list 1
New
personal list
Add station to personal list:
Mark in right-hand column and press to add.
Delete station from personal list:
Mark and press to remove.
Select other station list / sorting in right-hand
column with "right menu control button"
Use to save new list.
OK
OK
Adding stations to Personal list
The Personal list must be opened to add new
stations to it.

Select Add/remove Stations in the function list.
How to add stations is described in the left column.
Deleting stations from the Personal list
The Personal list must be opened to delete stations
in it.
 Select Add/remove Stations in the function list,
OKactivate.
go to personal list.

Mark the station to be deleted in the personal list,
OK activate. Function of the coloured keys in standard
PIP functionality.
BACK: Store and close station list.
Move / reorder stations in the Personal list
The personal list must be opened to move stations
in it.
 Select Move stations in the function list,
OKactivate.

Select station to be moved in the Personal list,
OK mark (station will be coloured red).

Select insert position (insert position will be
marked with a red line),
OK Execute move. Proceed in the same way with
additional stations.
BACK: Store and close station list.
Renaming the Personal list
The Personal list to be renamed must be opened.
 Select Rename list in the function list,
OKactivate.
Enter new name.
 Select Adopt.
OK New name for the personal list will be adopted.
Delete Personal list
The Personal list to be deleted must be opened.
Deleting of the list is irrevocable.
 Select Delete list in the function list,
OKactivate.
Art 40-60
User guide
91
System settings
Stations
Update station list automatically
Some programme providers offer an automatic update of the sta-
tion lists (Dynamic Channel Management). You may Allow or Block
an automatic station list update. If automatic updating is allowed, a
screen message about an available update appears whenever the
list is changed.
Allow/block updates
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Stations,
go to next column.
Mark Update station list automatically,
go to next column.
 Select Allow or Block,
OK adopt.
If the channel list is not up to date, it will be updated
automatically, provided the option Allow is select
-
ed
.
Updating the station list
A message appears whenever the TV is switched on if the network
provider changes their channel list.
In Update station list automatically, Allow must
be selected.
 Select the desired procedure.
...
Allow
Block
If the channel list is not up to date, it will be automatically
updated provided the parameter "Allow" is selected.
Because your network provider has changed its station list, it has to be adapted
on your TV set as well. Please specify when you wish to do this.
At once
After switch off to standby
Later
Update station list
Proceed with
At once
The station list will be immediately updated. Normally
this occurs in the background without interfering
further with the TV‘s operation. In exceptional cases,
it is however possible that during this process an au-
tomatic station change may be necessary.
After switch
off to
standby
The channel list will be updated the next time the TV
set is switched off into standby mode.
Later
Updating the channel list will be postponed to a later
date. When the TV set is switched on and off, the
update message will appear again.
OK Confirm selection.
Art 40-60
User guide
92
System settings
Control
Control
In the chapter Control you find settings for the various operating modes
like PIP and DR+ as well as settings referring in an interfunctional way
to your TV set like, for example, time and date and on-screen displays.
Calling Control
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Select Control,
go to next column.
Select desired menu item,
go to next column.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Control menu:
Language
Here you can define the menu language and for DVB
stations also the subtitle and audio language.
Parental
lock
With the parental lock you can bar access to all
stations immediately or daily for a certain period of
time. The stations can also be locked individually.
Age-dependent locking of programs with an appro-
priate age code is also possible.
EPG
Here you can do all EPG settings.
Energy
efficiency
Here you can determine how energy efficient your
TV set shall be.
Quick start
mode
Here you can enable the Quick Start Mode. The TV
set will then immediately switch on from standby
without delay.
Software
Here you can download new software from a USB
storage medium or from the Internet (as far as
requirements exist for this).
more ...
After confirmation with the OK key you will be offered
additional not so frequently used sub items for the
current menu item (see right hand column).
Control
Language
Parental
lock
Energy effi-
ciency
Software
more ...
EPG
Here you can define the menu language and for DVB
stations also the subtitle and audio language.
Quick start
mode
more ...
On-screen
displays
Here you can make settings for the duration, position
and existence of special on-screen displays.
Time and
date
The time and date are normally obtained automati-
cally from the TV.
DVB settings
Here you can make settings which only refer to DVB
stations (subtitles and audio mode, DVB character
set).
DR+
Here you can do all the settings for the digital re-
corder.
Standard
Teletext
Here you can do all Standard Teletext settings.
HbbTV
Here you can do all settings for the HbbTV mode.
CA
module(s)
Here you can allocate stations to a CA module or
assign the PIN for recordings.
Recording
Here you can specify the lead time and follow-up
time for recordings.
Hard disks
Here you find tools to format or check the hard disks.
key
function
Here you can assign another function to the Web
key. The selected function will then be called directly
when the key is pressed.
Art 40-60
User guide
93
System settings
Control
Language
Specify the language for all menus in the TV set in the language menu.
The language for the DVB subtitles and the film language can be set
for DVB programmes.
Call language
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark Language,
go to next column.
 Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Language menu:
Menu
You can change the menu language here.
Subtitle
(DVB)
If subtitles are provided by the DVB station, you can
set your desired language in advance here. If this is
included in the range of languages of the station, it
will be shown automatically.
You can also specify an alternative language under
this menu item, in case your chosen language is not
offered by the station.
Audio (DVB)
Specify your desired film language in advance here.
If this is included in the range of languages of the
station, it will be shown automatically.
You can also specify an alternative language under
this menu item, in case your chosen language is not
offered by the station.
.........
Language
Menu Subtitle (DVB) Audio (DVB)
Deutsch (de) ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ (el) Svenska (sv)
English (en) Polski (pl) Dansk (da)
Français (fr) Magyar (hu) Português (pt)
Italiano (it) Suomi (fi) ȇɭɫɫɤɢɣ (ru)
Español (es) Slovenščina (sl) Norsk (no)
Nederlands (nl) Slovenčina (sk) (zh)
Čeština (cs) Türkçe (tr)
Menu Subtitle (DVB) Audio (DVB)
Deutsch (de) ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ (el) Svenska (sv)
English (en) Polski (pl) Dansk (da)
Français (fr) Magyar (hu) Português (pt)
Italiano (it) Suomi (fi) ȇɭɫɫɤɢɣ (ru)
Español (es) Slovenščina (sl) Norsk (no)
Nederlands (nl) Slovenčina (sk) 中文 (zh)
Čeština (cs) Türkçe (tr)
Language
You can change the menu language here.
Back
EPG
Calling EPG settings
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark EPG,
go to next column.
Explanation of the EPG setting options:
Station
selection TV
Station
selection
Radio
In the Station selection you can determine for
which station in the programme guide, information
is to be displayed. Programme information is only
displayed for stations with
in the EPG list. Using
the on-screen buttons in the bottom line you can
mark all stations or unmark the stations or select
stations from specific (e.g., personal) lists.
Further information on EPG station selection you
find in chapter TV, section Electronic Programme
Guide – EPG wizard.
Due to the large number of receivable stations you
should restrict the station selection. This reduces the
data entry time and increases the clarity in the EPG.
Data
capture
Here you can switch the data entry for the electronic
programme guide (EPG) on and off.
If the data capture is switched on, your TV set tries to
update the database overnight (normally between 2
and 5 am) or, if required, two minutes after switching
to stand-by mode. The TV set must be on stand-by
for this and not switched off at the mains switch.
The indicator on the TV set lights blue during data
capture in stand-by mode.
The data are also updated while you are watching
the EPG station.
TV on when
memorised
When yes is selected in the setting, the switched off
TV switches on automatically in standby mode at
the beginning of a memorised programme. A screen
message appears when switching on. If this is not
confirmed within 5 minutes with the OK key, the TV
switches automatically off again for safety reasons.
Clear data
base
This menu item allows you to remove all data from
EPG database. It will take some time to retrieve this
data again.
......
EPG
Station se-
lection TV
Data cap-
ture
TV on when
memorised
Please mark the stations with for which you want a
program preview.
OK
Clear data-
base
Art 40-60
User guide
94
System settings
Control
Parental lock
You can select and set various security options to prevent unauthor-
ised use of the TV set and to protect your children from unsuitable
programmes.
Call Parental lock menu
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark Parental lock,
go to next column.
Define a four digit access code (PIN) the first time you
open it. Note the access code (PIN) well.
The access code must not consist of the same four
digits.
 Mark Confirm,
OK activate.
The new PIN must be entered and confirmed again.
The Parental lock menu will be opened.
The four-digit access code (PIN) must be entered
when the parental lock is opened in future. For security
reasons, it appears encrypted (****) when entering.
Note for unlocking
As soon as the PIN has once been entered to unlock your TV set, all
currently set parental locks will be disabled temporarily. Besides of the
general locks described in this chapter, this is also valid for parental
lock of DR+ archive entries. Parental locks will only be re-enabled when
the TV set is switched off.
......
Parental lock
Define 4 digit access code and memorise it, please.
(Note: The same digit must not be used four times).
Define 4 digit access code and memorise it, please.
(Note: The same digit must not be used four times).
Parental lock
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Cancel
Back
With the parental lock you can bar access to all stations immediately or daily for a certain period of time. The stations
can also be locked individually. Age dependent locking of prorams with an appropriate age code is also possible.
......
Parental
lock
Lock all stations Lock single stations Age-related lock Change acces code Deactivate
Immediately no yes
Daily no yes, from 00:00 until 00:00
Parental lock
Back
You can bar access to all stations. This can be done immediately or daily for a certain period of time.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Parental lock menu:
Lock all
stations
The TV set is locked immediately the menu is exited.
All programmes can then only be watched after
entering the access code.
The lock can be activated both Immediately and
for a Daily defined period.
The lock remains active until it is switched off in the
menu.
Lock single
stations
You can lock / unlock individual or all of the stations
in the station list specifically.
The lock remains active until it is switched off in the
menu.
Age-related
lock
Some DVB stations also broadcast an age classi-
fication. If the age set here is below the broadcast
age limit, the programme can only be watched after
entering the access code.
Change
access code
You can change your access code at any time. Enter
the new access code in place of the old one.
Deactivate
All set parental locks (locked stations, age-depen-
dent locks, locked films in the DR+ archive) are can-
celled. The current secret code is deleted. When the
parental lock is reactivated all the previous parental
locks are set again automatically.
Reset
All currently set parental locks are finally cancelled.
The access code is deleted.
Protection of minors for CI Plus programmes
Youth-protected broadcasts of programme providers with CI Plus
encoding possibly require you to enter the secret number (PIN) of
the CA module.
The Parental lock PIN of the CA module can be store in the TV set.
We recommend selecting the secret number of the TV set according
to the secret number of the CA module, since the secret number of
the CA module cannot be changed. This means that you must only
remember one secret number.
Code number
The code number cancels all entered access codes. It can be used for
example if you have forgotten your PIN. In the supplied quick guide you
find a note on the access code number. Remove this one from the quick
guide and keep it in a safe place.
Art 40-60
User guide
95
System settings
Control
Energy efficiency
Determine how energy efficient your TV set shall be. The value for
the contrast (and thus the brightness of the background lighting) is
adapted and the automatic dimmer activated or deactivated depend-
ing on the presetting.
Call Energy efficiency
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark Energy efficiency,
go to next column.
 Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Explanations of the setting options in the energy efficiency
menu:
Choosing Home Mode activates automatic shutdown. For Premium
Mode or Shop Mode, automatic shutdown is initially deactivated.
Home Mode
The emphasis for home use is on low energy con-
sumption. The automatic dimmer is activated.
Premium
Mode
This mode optimises the settings to a brighter
environment at a higher energy consumption. The
automatic dimmer is activated.
The use of this energy efficiency setting must be
confirmed afterwards once again.
Shop Mode
The picture settings are aligned to operation in the
presentation room. The automatic dimmer is deac-
tivated. If the ambient brightness diminishes, the
energy consumption is not reduced.
The use of this energy efficiency setting must be
confirmed afterwards once again.
...
Energy effi-
ciency
Home Mode
Premium
Mode
Shop Mode
The priority here is low energy consumption in home use. In this
case, the TV switches off automatically for the sake of saving
energy, after it has been out of operation for four hours.
Quick start mode
If you enable the Quick Start Mode and you switch on the TV set from
standby, the TV picture can be immediately seen without delay. You
can specify the times at which your device will be in the Quick Start
Mode.
Please note that in this case you will have a higher energy consumption.
Default setting for the Quick Start Mode: off
Call Quick start mode
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark Quick start mode,
go to next column.
 Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
...
Quick start
mode
Here you can specify the times at which your device
should be in quick start mode.
6 am - 9 am
11 am - 3 pm
6 pm - 9 pm
Quick start mode
Back
If you choose quick start here, you will see the TV screen immediately and without delay after switching on the TV set
from standby. Note the higher energy consumption in this case.
on off
on off
on off
Art 40-60
User guide
96
Software update
It is possible to update the software on your Loewe TV set.
In the software update (package update) all the software releases in
the TV are scanned and updated as required.
Updating the software is not possible as long as a programmed
timer recording is active.
When a software update occurs it may happen that timer entries and
memorised programmes are deleted. After such a software update,
check your timer list
(see chapter Extras, section Timer – Timer
list).
Here you can download a new piece of software from different sources
(if existing):
Current software versions can be downloaded from the Loewe Internet
site (see below) and installed on your TV set using a USB stick.
Please be aware of the requirements of your USB stick in section
Technical data – Media.
If your TV set is connected to the Internet, the TV set can be updated
directly via the Internet.
Software download from the Loewe Internet site for update
via USB
Where available, you can download new software for your TV set from
our homepage.
Visit our homepage under:
http://support.loewe.tv (International),
http://support.loewe.tv/uk ( United Kingdom and Republic of
Ireland),
http://support.loewe.tv/au (Australia) or
http://support.loewe.tv/nz (New Zealand).
(using the Register free-of-charge option).
Simply follow the steps in the registration process.
After the successful registration process and subsequent login to the
support homepage you have to register your TV set (have the article
number and serial number ready – both of these are on a label stuck
to the back of the set or can be looked up under Extras – Special-
functions – Integrated features.
Then you will get a list of downloadable contents for your TV set includ-
ing the software. Download the data and unpack all the files in this ZIP
archive into the main directory of your USB stick.
Then carry out the software update as described below.
USB stick - requirements
USB sticks tested by Loewe and compatible in type and format can
be ordered from the Loewe dealer using the article no. 90456.900.
If you would like to use your own USB stick, please follow these tips/
conditions:
Formatting in FAT32.
Just one partition.
Do not use encrypted USB sticks.
Do not use USB sticks that simulate a CD ROM drive.
There may be no hidden files on the device.
For some types of device, the construc-
tion of the USB stick is significant.
Maximum dimensions in mm: 70x20x10.
If in doubt, the USB stick should be formatted as “FAT32” without
“extended attributes”.
In order to avoid problems during the software update of the tv set
the USB stick in use should meet the requirements.
System settings
Control
Art 40-60
User guide
97
Software update via USB storage device
To do this, plug the USB stick with the downloaded software into a
free USB port of the TV set.
Calling Software update
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark Software,
go to next column.
 Mark Software update,
go to next column.
 Mark Via USB,
call Software update.
The version of the software package that is
currently installed will be displayed.
Proceed.
The TV set searches for a new software package
on the USB stick.
If a new software version is available after the search,
an on-screen message appears (see right hand
column).
If several different software packages are found on the
USB stick, the latest software package is always used.
If no new software package was found in the search:
BACK:End of wizard.
...... Via USB
Current software: 2.1.25.0
To load a new piece of software, you first need to search for said software on a
USB storage device that is connected (e.g. USB stick). Press the key to start
the search.
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - Current software
Proceed with Cancel with
New software package found
Proceed starts loading of the new software.
Or:
BACK: End of wizard.
The update will then not be carried out.
Load new software package
The software is loaded in several steps. The total loading
and programming process can take up to approx. 50
minutes in total.
Please do not switch off your TV set with the mains
switch during the entire loading and programming
process.
You will be informed at the end of the update.
To make your TV set completely ready for use again,
please turn it off and on again at the mains.
...... Via USB
New software
Proceed withProceed with End withEnd with
A new software version was found.
New software: V2.3.14.0 (Current software: V.2.1.25.0)
If you now wish to load the new software, press the button. Otherwise
close with the button.
Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the
data.
A new software version was found.
New software: V2.3.14.0 (Current software: V.2.1.25.0)
If you now wish to load the new software, press the button. Otherwise
close with the button.
Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the
data.
60%
...
... Via USB
Note: The loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.
Note: The loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.
Updating software
The "V2.3.14.0" software is currently being programmed, please wait ...
System settings
Control
Art 40-60
User guide
98
Manual update via the Internet
If an Internet connection is available, new software can be downloaded
directly and installed onto the TV set.
Calling Software update
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark Software,
go to next column.
 Mark Software update,
go to next column.
 Mark Via Internet,
go to next column.
You will see a message on the screen regarding
data protection.
If you are not in agreement with the relevant data being
passed on:
BACK: Exit the update process.
The update will then not be carried out.
Otherwise: Confirm data protection message by press-
ing .
The version of the software package that is currently
installed will be displayed.
Proceed.
The TV set connects to the Internet and scans
the update server for new software.
If a new software version is available after the search, an
on-screen message appears (see right hand column).
If no new software package was found in the search:
BACK: End of wizard.
...
Start update
In accordance with the local laws and regulations, we point out that machine
numbers and the installation site of your TV set , as well as the current updates
and the current software status in each case, are processed and saved by a
computer system if you use the button to confirm. The data guarantee that
we are always able to provide you with optimal service. All data are handled
in confidence.
If you do not wish this to be the case, please press the button.
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - Data protection
Proceed with End with
......
Start update
Current software: 2.1.0.0
To load a new piece of software, you first need to search for said software on the
update server. Press the key to start the search.
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - Current software
Proceed withBack with
New software package found
Proceed starts loading of the new software.
Or:
BACK: End of wizard.
The update will then not be carried out.
Load new software package
Only the parts of the software package that are not up
to date will be automatically downloaded from the
Internet and updated.
Each part of the software is downloaded individually
from the Internet and is then programmed.
The total time required for all the software parts to be
downloaded from the Internet is dependent on the
speed of data transfer that is being used.
The total programming process can take up to 50
minutes in total.
Please do not switch off your TV set with the mains
switch during the entire loading and programming
process.
You will be informed once the loading and programming
process is complete.
To make your TV set completely ready for use again,
please turn it off and on again at the mains.
......
New software
Proceed withProceed with End withEnd with
A new software version was found.
New software: V2.3.14.0 (Current software: V.2.1.25.0)
If you now wish to load the new software, press the button. Otherwise
close with the button.
Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the
data.
A new software version was found.
New software: V2.3.14.0 (Current software: V.2.1.25.0)
If you now wish to load the new software, press the button. Otherwise
close with the button.
Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the
data.
Start update
60%
...
...
Note: The loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.
Note: The loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.
Updating software
The "V2.3.14.0" software is currently being programmed, please wait ...
Start update
System settings
Control
Art 40-60
User guide
99
Software update via Antenna
A software update via antenna is only available for stations of the
Freeview DVB-T platform in the UK and Ireland.
Calling Software update
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark Software,
go to next column.
 Mark Software update,
go to next column.
 Mark Via Antenna,
call Software update.
You will see a message on the screen regarding
data protection.
Proceed.
The TV set searches for a new software package.
If a new software version is available after the search, an
on-screen message appears (see right hand column).
If no new software package was found in the search:
BACK: End of wizard.
New software package found
Proceed starts loading of the new software.
Or:
BACK: End of wizard.
The update will then not be carried out.
...... Via antenna
Current software: 2.1.25.0
To load a new piece of software, you first need to search for said software on a
USB storage device that is connected (e.g. USB stick). Press the key to start
the search.
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - Current software
Proceed with Cancel with
...... Via antenna
New software
Proceed withProceed with End withEnd with
A new software version was found.
New software: V2.3.14.0 (Current software: V.2.1.25.0)
If you now wish to load the new software, press the button. Otherwise
close with the button.
Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the
data.
A new software version was found.
New software: V2.3.14.0 (Current software: V.2.1.25.0)
If you now wish to load the new software, press the button. Otherwise
close with the button.
Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the
data.
Load new software package
The software is downloaded in several steps. The total
downloading and programming process can take up to
approx. 50 minutes in total.
Please do not switch off your TV set with the mains
switch during the entire loading and programming
process.
You will be informed at the end of the update.
To make your TV set completely ready for use again,
please turn it off and on again with the mains switch.
60%
...
...
Via antenna
Note: The loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.
Note: The loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.
Updating software
The "V2.3.14.0" software is currently being programmed, please wait ...
System settings
Control
Art 40-60
User guide
100
Automatic update via the internet
At the end of the initial installation, Information on new software
updates was selected.
This item cannot be called up via the menu, but appears automati-
cally when a new version is found in the search for software.
New software package found
If the TV set has found a new software version during the check, you
will be informed about this via a screen message.
 Select the desired procedure.
Load the
software
now
After confirmation, the new TV software will be
loaded from the internet and then programmed.
Load the
software
when
switch off to
standby
The software will be loaded and programmed after
the TV set has been switched off into standby mode
for the next time. The display on the control panel
will light up blue during the update.
The TV set must not be switched off at the mains
before the downloading process is complete (control
panel display lights up white)!
Load the
software
later (at
most
three-fold
notification)
Loading the software will be postponed to a later date.
The new software message will be displayed the next
time the TV set is switched on.
If the loading process is postponed three times then
the message will only be shown again once the next
software version is available.
Do not
load this
software
version
The new software will not be loaded. The on-screen
message will only be shown again for the next soft-
ware version.
Confirm selection.
A new software version was found.
New software: V2.1.27.0 (Freeman Boot FRC FRCW1 STB WLAN FEA)
(Current software V2.1.25.0)
Please specify how you would like to continue:
Load the software now
Load software when switching off to standby
Load software later (max. 3 times notification)
Do not load this software version
New software
System settings
Control
Art 40-60
User guide
101
System settings
Control
On-screen displays
You can select different settings in this menu which affect the on-
screen displays.
Call On-screen displays
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark On-screen displays,
go to next column.
 Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the On-screen
displays menu:
Display time
Here you set the duration of the display, e.g. for
the volume or the station display when changing
stations.
The duration can be set between 2 and 9 seconds.
Volume
display
Here you set whether a volume change is also to be
indicated visibly on the screen.
Automatic
menu info
Herewith you activate/deactivate the info text dis-
plays for the currently selected menu item.
Key
explanation
By default, the window will appear with key explana-
tions along with the status bar. Here, you can disable
this automatic display.
Permanent
clock display
The time display can be permanently shown. It is
always visible as long as no other display is made.
Automatic
HDMI hint
If yes is set here, a message about the adapted
function of the remote control is shown whenever you
switch over to an HDMI channel position to which a
Digital Link HD capable TV set is connected.
......
On-screen
displays
Display time
Volume display
Automatic menu info
Key explanation
Permanent clock display
Automatic HDMI hint
On-screen displays
If you select "on" here, the informational text belonging to each selected menu item will always appear
simultaneously.
Back
< 7s >
off on
off on
off on
off on
off on
< 7s >
off on
on
off on
off on
on
Time and date
Time and date are automatically detected and set via the DVB pro-
gramme provider (e.g. Astra, UPC) or, during an Internet connection,
via Internet time services.
If a definite time has been detected by the TV set (depending on
the programme provider), time and date cannot be changed.
Call Time and date
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark Time and date,
go to next column.
 Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Time and date menu:
If a definite time has been identified by the TV set (dependent on
the channel), certain menu items may not be available.
Time
Enter the time (00:00 to 23:59) with the numeric
buttons of the remote control.
Deviation
from
Universal
Time
The current time at the Greenwich Meridian 0 is to be
understood as world time. The time shift in relation
to this time must be given in hours (–11 to +13) (with
the keys  or the numerical keys of the remote
control). Summer time is ignored.
Date Enter the date (day.month.year) with the numeric
buttons on the remote control.
Summer/
winter
If the summer time in your country is changed to
Daylight-saving time, select yes please.
Beginning of
daylight-
saving time
Enter the date on which the time is switched over to
summer time if it deviates from the automatically
calculated date. This menu item appears only if yes
was selected for Daylight-saving time.
End
of daylight-
saving time
Enter the date on which the summer time ends if
it deviates from the automatically calculated date.
This menu item appears only if yes was selected for
Daylight-saving time.
......
Time and
date
Time
Deviation from Universal Time
Date
Summer/winter
Beginning of daylight-saving time
End of daylight-saving time
Time
Deviation from Universal Time
Date
Summer/winter
Beginning of daylight-saving time
End of daylight-saving time
Time and date
12:05:58
< +2:00 hour(s) >
22.08.2012
off on
25.03.
28.10.
12:05:58
< +2:00 hour(s) >
22.08.2012
off on
.03.
28.10.
Back
The time and date are normally obtained automatically from the TV. If, as an exception, these data are not present or incorrect,
please enter the time (00:00 to 23:59) and the date (day.month.year) here using the remote control.
Art 40-60
User guide
102
System settings
Control
DVB settings
You can make general pre-settings for DVB stations.
Calling DVB settings
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark DVB settings,
go to next column.
Explanation of the DVB setting options:
Subtitle
mode
Here you can preset whether a subtitle is always to be
displayed as soon as it is offered by the station. A spe-
cial subtitle for impaired hearing can also be selected.
Subtitles are not offered by all stations. Many stations
only broadcast subtitles by teletext.
DVB
character
set
Select the DVB character set so that the title of the
broadcast of your favourite received station or the
texts of your CA module are displayed correctly.
Audio
commentary
You can preset the system here to always play a
special soundtrack for the visually impaired whene-
ver one is available. This soundtrack uses an audio
commentary to describe the action taking place
on-screen.
...
DVB settings
Subtitle mode Off normal For hearing-impaired persons
DVB character set Western European Standard Polish Greek Turkish
Audio commentary off on
Subtitle mode Off normal For hearing-impaired persons
DVB character set Western European Standard Polish Greek Turkish
off on
DVB settings
Back
Here you can preset whether a subtitle is always to be displayed as soon as it is offered by the station. A special subtitle
for impaired hearing can also be selected.
Art 40-60
User guide
103
(1
for devices in DK, FIN, N or S: yes.
System settings
Control
DR
+
Here you can make settings for the Digital recorder. The settings are
related to USB recording (externally connected USB hard disk) or DR+
streaming (shared use of other Loewe TV sets).
Call settings for the digital recorder
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark DR+,
go to next column.
 Mark desired setting,
go to next column.
 Make settings,
OK confirm setting.
Explanation of the DR+ setting options
Notify
hidden
sections
If an entry has been hidden in an archive recording,
you can get informed by a screen message when
skipping a hidden area.
Factory setting: yes.
Jump
distance
Set the standard jump distance (in minutes) used
for jumping forwards or backwards in the movie by
briefly pressing the or keys.
Factory setting: 02 min.
Smart jump
Activate or deactivate Smart jump function.
Factory setting: on.
Serial
recording
tolerance
A broadcast programmed with the recording type
series is recorded only if it begins within the program-
med start time
± series recording tolerance. Use the
numeric button on the remote control to enter the
time (always two-digit for 01 to 60 min.).
Factory setting:
± 30 min.
Recording
subtitles
Select here whether subtitles are to be recorded for
DVB stations.
Factory setting: no
(1
.
DR+
Streaming
For setting options see right hand column.
...
DR+
Notify hid-
den sections
Jump dis-
tance
Smart Jump
Recording
subtitles
DR+
Streaming
If a fade-out has already been executed in an existing
recording and you put "yes" here, after this point has been
passed you are informed during playback that the faded-out
area has just been skipped. "no" aborts this message.
Call DR+ streaming settings
The DR+ settings are called (see left column).
 Mark DR+ Streaming,
go to next column.
 Mark desired setting,
go to next column.
 Make settings,
OK confirm setting.
Explanation of the setting options for DR+ streaming
Use Archive
other TVs
Setting yes enables you, via the archive, to also view
recordings from other TV sets that have accessible
movies within the home network (client function).
Notify
started
„Follow me“
recording
Your TV set can issue a message if a follow-me re-
cording has been started on another TV set, which
you can view on this TV set..
DR+
device name
Give your TV set a unique name for quick identifica-
tion in DR+ Streaming.
DR+ device
group name
Give a name for your TV set group.
Using different group names enables you to group
your TV sets as required. Only TV sets under the
same group name can exchange data.
IP port
number
IP port numbers are preset ex-factory. Under normal
circumstances they do not require amending.
...
DR+
Streaming
Use Archive
other TVs
DR+ device
name
Notify start-
DR+ device
group name
IP port
number
By selecting "yes" here, you can view films from the DR+
archives of other Loewe TVs that have been set up for this
function, as long as these units have had their DR+ archives
made accessible. Again, this takes place using your home
network.
Art 40-60
User guide
104
System settings
Control
Standard Teletext
In the Standard Teletext menu you can configure the Teletext.
Call Teletext settings
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark Standard Teletext,
go to next column.
Explanations of the Standard Teletext menu functions:
Character set
Teletext character set can be switched to other lan-
guages (Russian, Greek, Polish and Turkish).
...
Standard Te-
letext
Special pages
Character set
The programme preview pages and the page for the programme subtitles are
specified here.
Art 40-60
User guide
105
System settings
Control
HbbTV
HbbTV mode on/off
When the HbbTV mode is active (factory setting), additional services
and further information (e.g., also from the Internet) can be viewed if
these are offered by the current station.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark HbbTV,
go to next column
 Mark HbbTV mode,
call.
 Select the desired setting,
confirm with OK.
...
HbbTV
mode
on
When the HbbTV mode (Hybrid broadcast broadband TV
mode) ist actvie, additional services and further information
(e.g. from the Internet) can be viewed if these offered by
the current station.
Start behaviour of HbbTV-stations
If HbbTV mode
p
on has been selected (see left column), you can
specify if an available HbbTV application should be loaded automati-
cally after the channel has been changed or if this should only occur
manually after the red key has been pressed once. After loading the
HbbTV application, an on screen instruction is displayed depending
on the programme provider.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark HbbTV,
go to next column
 Mark Start behaviour of HbbTV,
call.
 Mark station,
OK switch between manual (
?
) and automatic ( )
start of the HbbTV application of the marked
station.
Or:
 Mark Start all automatically,
OK start HbbTV application on all stations auto-
matically.
Or:
 Mark Start all manually,
OK start HbbTV application on all stations manually.
Using the on-screen buttons in the bottom line you
can display stations from specific (e.g., personal)
lists.
...
1 Das Erste HD
2 ZDF HD
3 RTL HD
4 SAT.1 HD
5 ProSieben HD
6 VOX HD
7 kabel eins HD
8 RTL2 HD
9 SUPER RTL HD
10 KiKa HD
11 NICK/CC HD
12 3sat HD
13 N24 HD
14 PHOENIX HD
15 n-tv
16 TELE 5 HD
17 SPORT1 HD
18 arte HD
19 DMAX HD
20 Eurosport
21 VIVA
22 DAS VIERTE
100 Das Erste HD
101 NDR FS NDS
102 NDR FS SH H
103 NDR FS MV H
104 NDR FS HH H
105 WDR HD Köl
106 WDR HD Aac
107 WDR HD Biel
108 WDR HD Dor
109 WDR HD Düs
110 WDR HD Esse
Start all automatically Start all manually < ASTRA 19,2°E >
Back
Start behaviour of HbbTV stations
Change between automatic ( ) and manual (?) start of HbbTV with .
OK
Art 40-60
User guide
106
System settings
Control
Feature of the TEXT key
With the setting Standard Teletext first (factory setting), the
standard Teletext is opened when the TEXT key is pressed for the
first time. Pressing the TEXT key for a second time will then display
the MediaText. Pressing the TEXT key for a third time will bring you
back to the TV picture. If MediaText first is selected, the TEXT key
will do the exact opposite.
Depending on the programme provider, the direct Call of MediaText
may not be possible. MediaText must then be opened by means of
the HbbTV application.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark HbbTV,
go to next column
 Mark Function of the TEXT key,
call.
 Select Standard Teletext first or MediaText
first.
......
Function of
the TEXT key
Standard
teletext first
If MediaText is available for the selected channel and the
"Standard teletext first“ option is highlighted, standard
teletext will be opened the first time you press the
button. Pressing the button for a second time will then display
the MediaText. Pressing the button for a third time will
bring you back to the TV picture. If „MediaText first“ is
selected, then the button does the exact opposite (i.e. displays
MediaText first and standard teletext upon pressing the
button for a second time).
CA module(s)
This menu is only available when at least one CA module is plugged
in.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark CA module(s),
go to next column.
Station mapping
If two CA modules are both used for the decoding of stations, you
decide here which station shall be decoded by which CA module.
The station mapping settings will only be taken into account, if two
CA modules are inserted.
This statement refers explicitly to the CI slots of the TV set and not
to the modules plugged into it! When the modules are exchanged,
the mapping must be repeated.
 Mark Station mapping,
call station list.
 Select CA module for mapping.
 Mark the station,
OK map station to the selected CA module / cancel
mapping.
The icon
indicates mapped stations.
Saving the PIN for recordings
This menu item is only available if a CI Plus CA module is inserted
into one of the two CI slots of the TV set that supports the recording
of broadcasts with parental lock.
Store the programme provider PIN belonging to your CA module in
order to decode CI plus programmes with parental lock for recording.
 mark Saving the PIN for recordings,
call PIN entry box.
 Mark the desired CA module in the
headline.
 Go to the PIN entry box, enter the programme
provider PIN using the numerical keys.
Or:
 Mark figure,
OK adopt figure to input line.
Conclude the entry:
 Mark Adopt,
OK save PIN.
Art 40-60
User guide
107
System settings
Control
Record
You can set a pre-record and post-record time for timer recordings
made without auto time control. This minimizes the risk that a part
of the broadcast is not recorded due to the broadcast starting earlier
and/or finishing later.
Call Recording settings
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark Recording,
go to next column.
 Select Pre-record time or post-record time.
 Mark the desired duration of the pre-record
time or of the post-record time.
Factory setting: pre-record time: 1 min,
post-record time: 5 min.
...
Recording
0 min 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 7 min 8 min
0 min 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 7 min 8 min
0 min 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 7 min 8 min
0 min 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 7 min 8 min
Recording
Pre-record time
Post-record-time
Back
Here you can enter a time span specifiying how long before the scheduled time your programmed recording should
start so that programmes which begin too early are recorded in full.
Hard disks
Formatting the hard disk
If you want to use an external hard disk on your TV, you must format
it on the TV.
Additionally, you can re-format the hard disk in order to quickly and
easily delete all the data stored on it.
Warning!
Formatting the hard disk will erase all data stored on it!
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark Hard disks,
go to next column.
 Mark Format integrated one or Format exter-
nal one,
confirm.
A warning note will be displayed.
OKPress at least for three seconds to start format-
ting.
Or:
BACK: Cancel procedure
Never ever switch off the TV set during a formatting
process.
After the formatting, a message will appear on the
screen showing the results of the formatting and tips
on how to resolve any problems that exist, should there
be any.
After the formatting the TV set must be switched
off and on again.
Note on formatting external USB disks:
The TV set supports the two hard disk file systems FAT 32 and NTFS.
External hard disks are formatted by the TV in the FAT32 file system
to full capacity.
With FAT32, the maximum size of a file is 4 GB.
For a parallel use of TV and PC, we recommend that you reformat
the hard disk on a PC to NTFS.
...
Hard disks
Format
external one
CAUTION
Do you really want to
format the external hard
drive?
Formatting deletes all
the data on the hard
drive.
To start formatting, hold
down the button for
at least three seconds.
OK
If problems occur when operating the external
hard drive, it may be fixed by formatting
the hard disk. However, please be aware that this
will delete all data on the storage medium.
Art 40-60
User guide
108
System settings
Control
WEB key function
You can assign the Web key on the remote control unit a particular
function.
The selected function will then be called directly when the key is
pressed.
Call WEB key settings
Default setting: MediaNet
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark
key function,
go to next column.
 Select function.
...
key
function
Sound/pic-
ture music
Sound
mode
Picture for-
mat
Headphone
volume
3D
Internet ra-
dio
Photo
Video
You can assign the button another function here. The
selected function is then accessed directly when the button
is pressed.
WEB
WEB
Art 40-60
User guide
109
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Network settings
Under Network settings you make settings to your network adaptors
and the various types of media.
Call network settings
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Multimedia / Network,
go to next column.
 Mark Network settings,
go to next column.
 Select desired menu item,
go to next column.
Explanations of the setting options in the network menu:
Networking
Here, the network wizard starts that guides you
through all necessary settings to your network (see
right hand column).
Reset to
factory
settings
Here, all network settings are reset to factory de-
faults.
Host name
Give your TV set a name so that it can be uniquely
identified in the network.
Proxy server
Do the settings for using a proxy server. The proxy
server wizard will be called.
Wake on
LAN/WiFi
If you allow Switch on via LAN/WLAN, the TV set can
be switched on via the network when it is in standby.
Thus, energy consumption of the TV set will incre-
ase when it is in standby mode!
...
Network
settings
Networking
The following antenna wizard guides you through all the
necessary settings relevant to your network.
Host name
Proxy server
Wake on
LAN/WiFi
Network
The Network wizard will be started. You see the current network status.
Change network settings.
Network selection
 Select network access.
Explanations of the setting options:
Off
deactivates all existing network adaptors of your
TV set.
On,
wired only
Access to the network only via a network cable. The
wireless access is deactivated.
The network wizard will be opened.
On,
wireless only
Access to the network only via WLAN. The access
via a network cable is deactivated.
The network wizard will be opened.
On, wireless
+ bridge
function
Both network adaptors are activated. Wireless Inter-
net access is possible (WLAN).
Internet-enabled devices connected to the network
socket (LAN) (e.g., Loewe MediaCenter, Loewe
BluTechVision 3D) can use the wireless connection
of the TV set to access the Internet via the WLAN
bridge function.
The network wizard will be opened.
Under no circumstances may the TV set be
wired and at the same time connected by a
wireless connection to the same network, e.g.
router.
This may cause severe operational faults!
OK proceed.
.
...
Networking
Please select the desired network mode from the list or switch it off completely.
Note:
The "bridge function" allows additional network-compatible devices (e.g. LOEWE Blu-ray
Player) to be connected to the TV's network socket without their own network access, in
order to also use the TV's wireless network connection.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the button.
off
On, wired only
On, wireless only
On, wireless + bridge function
Select network mode
Back with
Art 40-60
User guide
110
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Configuration of the built-in LAN adaptor
The network wizard was called via the network ac-
cess setting On, wired only.
IP configuration
 Select type of IP configuration.
automatic: Automatic configuration of the IP
address via DHCP server or via multiple
protocols according to UPnP specifica-
tion (including DHCP).
OK proceed to network status (see below).
manual: Enter your fixed static IP addresses
manually (see below).
OK proceed to Manual IP configuration.
Manual IP configuration
If manual has been selected under IP configuration:
 Enter IP, Subnet mask, Gateway and DNS server
addresses in succession with the numerical keys
on the remote control.
proceed to network status.
Network status
You see the current network status again.
BACK: End of wizard.
.
...
IP address 192.168.000.123
Subnet mask 255.255.255.000
Gateway 192.168.000.100
DNS server 1 192.168.000.010
DNS server 2 192.168.001.010
Back with Proceed with
Netzworking
Manual IP configuration
Please specify the static IP address of the network adapter.
Configuration of the built-in WLAN bridge adaptor
The network wizard was called via the network
access setting On, wireless only or Wireless +
bridge function.
Search for Access points
The TV set now searches for wireless routers.
BACK: Stop search.
Access point selection
After the end of the search:
 Select required access point from the options
found.
OK Proceed to entry of WLAN password.
No access point found
If the desired access point is not found:
 Mark Search again,
OK repeat search for wireless routers.
Or:
 Mark Enter access point manually,
OK
enter manually the SSID of the desired access
point, e.g., when the SSID of the access point is
not transferred.
OK Proceed to entry of WLAN password.
WLAN password (WPA password / WEP password / WEP index)
If your wireless network is not encrypted: Proceed to
IP configuration.
Enter WLAN password.
In case of an unknown WLAN key, contact your
network administrator.
For encryption types supported, see chapter Tech-
nical data, section Media.
For WEP encryption
 Select the WEP index,
OK proceed to IP configuration.
IP configuration
 Select type of IP configuration.
For the further workflow of the network wizard
see left column under IP configuration.
Network status
At the end of the network wizard you see your current
network status again.
BACK: End of wizard.
Art 40-60
User guide
111
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Explanation of the adaptor settings:
Network
shows the current type of connection (wireless or
wired).
IP
configuration
The current assignment method for the IP address
of your TV set (automatic or manual).
IP address
Your current IP address.
Subnet mask
Your current subnet-mask IP address.
Gateway
The IP address of your gateway.
DNS server 1
Your current first DNS server IP address.
DNS server 2
Your current second DNS server IP address.
Network
SSID
(for wireless connection only)
The name of your network.
MAC address
(TV)
(for wired connection only)
Indicates the MAC address that is built into the hard-
ware of your TV set’s wired network adaptor (LAN).
MAC address
(WLAN)
(for wireless connection only)
Indicates the MAC address that is built into the
hardware of your TV set’s wireless network adaptor
(WLAN).
Connection
status
Gives you information about the current status of
your wireless connection (save settings, connecting,
login failed, access point not found, not connected,
connection established).
Link
quality
Specifies the signal strength as a percentage.
Proxy server settings
In the proxy server wizard your TV set establishes the
link with a home network with proxy server.
A proxy server is not necessary for most home
networks.
Contact your home network administrator if you are
unclear about the proxy server settings.
Use proxy server
Specify if a Proxy server is used in your home network.
 Mark Use or Don’t use,
OK confirm selection.
The following settings will only be requested after the
selection of Use.
Proxy server name
Specify the name or IP address of the proxy server
used.
Proxy port number
Specify the network port number of the proxy server.
Proxy server login
Specify whether your proxy server requires a special
login.
 Mark No login or Login necessary,
OK Confirm selection.
User name and password
User name and password are only requested after
the selection of Login necessary.
Enter your login data for the proxy server.
Art 40-60
User guide
112
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Multimedia settings
Under this menu item you find further settings for Audio, Video and
Photo.
Calling the Multimedia settings menu
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Multimedia / Network,
go to next column.
 Mark Multimedia settings,
go to next column.
 Select desired settings.
Explanations of the setting options in the Multimedia settings
menu:
Auto return
to music
player
The music player will reappear whenever another
dialogue, e.g., music selection is called during play-
back, and no keys are pressed for the set time period.
You can specify if and after which time the music
player reappears (selection options are No, After
1 min, After 5 min).
...
Multimedia
settings
When navigating through the files if you pause in this view
you can input whether and when the view should
automatically return to the player.
Renderer
Here you can allow external devices to access your TV set (renderer)
via app to render (play back) contents there.
Call up renderer menu
Default setting: on
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Multimedia / Network,
go to next column.
 Mark Renderer,
go to next column.
 Select the setting on or off.
...
Renderer
on
off
You can allow external devices here and access your TV
(renderer) via an app to play content there.
Art 40-60
User guide
113
System settings
Connections
Connections
Settings for the connection of external appliances are made in this
menu.
The menu item Connections is not available while a timer record-
ing is active.
Calling the connections menu
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Connections,
go to next column.
 Select desired settings.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Connections menu:
Sound
components
The sound components wizard helps you to confi-
gure the components that are used to reproduce
the TV sound.
Antenna DVB
Here you can set the parameters of the DVB-T and
the DVB-S antenna with the antenna wizard.
AV
connecting
settings
In the AV connecting settings the parameters for the
AV connection socket can be adapted.
Digital Link
All settings for Digital Link are made here.
Gaming
mode
Here you can set a faster display of your activities on
the screen for various inputs of the TV set, e.g., for
games consoles.
Connections
Sound com-
ponents
Antenna
DVB
AV connect-
ing settings
A wizard guides you step by step through the
configuration of your sound reproduction components.
Digital Link
Gaming
mode
Art 40-60
User guide
114
System settings
Connections
Sound components
The sound components wizard helps you to configure the components
that are used to reproduce the TV sound. For sound reproduction, you
can configure the TV loudspeakers as well as digital HiFi/AV amplifiers.
Calling the sound components wizard
For information on navigation within the wizard, see chapter General
information on menu operation.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Select Connections,
go to next column.
 Select Sound components,
go to next column.
 Select Sound component.
For selectable items see right hand column.
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
Sound playback via ...
TV
speakers
Sound reproduction via the built-in TV speakers
(factory setting).
With the selection of TV speakers the wizard will end.
HiFi/AV
amplifier
Sound reproduction via an external digital audio
amplifier.
Connecting HiFi/AV amplifier:
see chapter External devices, section Connecting
the HiFi/AV amplifier.
Sound
projector
Sound reproduction via a Loewe Individual Sound
Projector. For further information, refer to the opera-
ting instructions of the sound projector.
HiFi/AV
amplifier or
TV speakers
(switchable)
Sound reproduction optionally via an external digital
audio amplifier or via the built-in TV loudspeakers.
The selection options for switching between
sound components can be called via the function
list under Sound settings.
Sound
projector or
TV speakers
(switchable)
Sound reproduction optionally via a sound projector
or via the built-in TV loudspeakers.
The selection options for switching between
sound components can be called via the function
list under Sound settings.
...
...
Sound com-
ponents
SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD - Sound playback via ...
Finish wizard with
Please specify here via which sound components you want to listen to your
TV sound. If you do not want to listen exclusively via the built-in speakers,
all additional speakers or devices must be connected with the audio
output sockets AUDIO DIGITAL OUT.
If you have a TV set without built-in speakers, the items relating to the TV
speakers may not be selected.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the
button.
TV speakers
HiFi/AV amplifier
Soundprojector
HiFi/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable)
Sound projector or TV speakers (switchable)
OK
Setting the HiFi/AV amplifier
Sound playback via ... - HiFi/AV amplifier
The sound components wizard permits configuration of different
audio amplifiers (stereo amplifiers, surround amplifiers, analogue or
digital) with different digital audio formats (Dolby Digital, dts, MPEG,
and stereo/PCM). See the user guide of the audio amplifier for more
information.
For information on navigation within the wizard see
chapter General information on menu operation.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Select Connections,
go to next column.
 Select Sound components,
Call sound components wizard.
Mark HiFi/AV amplifier or HiFi/AV amplifier or
TV speakers (switchable),
OK Confirm selection.
HiFi/AV
amplifier
Select setting when an amplifier is connected and
the TV speakers are not used.
HiFi/AV
amplifier or
TV speakers
(switchable)
Select setting when an amplifier is connected and
the TV speakers are used. In the sound mode selec-
tion the audio reproduction can then be switched
between the amplifier and the TV speakers.
Proceed to next step.
Select sound formats which can be decoded with
the digital amplifier (see operating manual of the
used amplifier).
OK adopt sound formats.
Back: Finish wizard.
...
...
Sound com-
ponents
SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD - Sound playback via ...
Finish wizard with
Please specify here via which sound components you want to listen to your
TV sound. If you do not want to listen exclusively via the built-in speakers,
all additional speakers or devices must be connected with the audio
output sockets AUDIO DIGITAL OUT.
If you have a TV set without built-in speakers, the items relating to the TV
speakers may not be selected.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the
button.
TV speakers
HiFi/AV amplifier
Soundprojector
HiFi/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable)
Sound projector or TV speakers (switchable)
OK
Sound
reproduction
via ...
Sound
formats
...
Sound com-
ponents
Stereo (PCM)
dts
MPEG
Dolby Digital
Stereo (PCM)
Sound formats
Please specify, what kind of sound formats can be processed by your
HiFi/AV amplifier and mark them by the button .
Proceed withBack with
OK
Art 40-60
User guide
115
System settings
Connections
Antenna DVB
Here you can make settings for the DVB-T antenna and call the antenna
wizard for the DVB-S antenna.
Call Antenna DVB
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Connections,
go to next column.
 Mark Antenna DVB,
go to next column.
 Select the desired setting,
 call.
Explanations of the setting options in the antenna DVB menu:
Antenna
DVB-S
Here the antenna wizard starts guiding you through
all the settings relevant to the DVB-S antenna. The
settings of the DVB-S antenna wizard are explained
in the procedure of initial installation.
Antenna
DVB-T
Here you can set whether your DVB-T antenna needs
a supply voltage.
Antennas with an integrated amplifier need a supply
voltage on the antenna line. In this case, select Sup-
ply voltage 5V and confirm with OK.
Otherwise, select No supply voltage and confirm
also with OK.
Positioning/aligning DVB-T antenna
If you are receiving one or more DVB-T stations with picture and sound
interference then you should change the installation location and
alignment of the antenna. Ask your dealer to tell you which channels
are used to broadcast the DVB-T stations in your region.
A DVB-T station is received and selected.
Calling manual search (see chapter System settings, section Stations
– Manual TV/Radio scan).
Due to the preset stations, the signal source is already selected as
DVB-T. Position and align the antenna so that maximum C/N values
and levels are reached.
Search for DVB-T stations one after the other and compare values for
C/N and Level. Then position/align the antenna to the weakest station
so that maximum values for C/N and Level are obtained. The value
for BER should be as low as possible.
Thereafter, perform an automatic search for all DVB-T stations.
...
Antenna DVB
Antenna
DVB-S
Antenna
DVB-T
The following antenna wizard guides you through all the
necessary settings relevant to your antenna system.
AV connection settings
In the AV connection settings menu the parameters for the AV con-
nection socket can be adapted.
Calling the connections menu
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Connections,
go to next column.
 Mark AV connecting settings,
go to next column.
 Select the desired setting,
 call.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the AV connecting settings
menu:
Device at
connection
AV
Indicate here whether a set and, if yes, which one is
connected to the AV socket.
Signal type
You set the signal type of the device connected to AV
or AVS here. Normally, you should leave the setting to
Automatic VHS/SVHS; otherwise select a suitable
signal type. You can find out more from your dealer.
Allow
switching
voltage
If this function is activated, the video and audio of an
external unit connected to the AV connector (not at
AVS) will immediately be reproduced on all TV broad-
cast sites when playback is started up, provided that
the external unit supplies a switching voltage.
...
AV connect-
ing settings
Signal type
Please input whether a device is connected to the AV
socket and if so, which device.
Allow switch-
ing voltage
Art 40-60
User guide
116
System settings
Connections
Digital Link
In the digital link menu you make further setting for comfortably linking
external devices to the TV set.
Call Digital Recorder Link menu
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Connections,
go to next column.
 Mark Digital Link,
OK call Digital Link.
 Select the desired setting,
 call.
Explanations of the setting options in the Digital Link menu:
Digital Link
HD
functionality
Herewith you can allow or forbid the automatic com-
munication between the TV set and linked external
devices (e.g., BluRay player). Among other things, it's
role is that these devices switch mutually on and off.
Remote TV
switch on of
the TV set
Here you can select whether the TV set is to switch
on automatically from Standby mode, if Digital Link
HD or Digital Link Plus capable devices connected
to an HDMI or to AV inputs start playback or display
a screen menu.
Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD -
Functionality ט on has been selected.
Shutdown of
the ext.
device via TV
button
You can select here whether the external Digital Link
HD device that is currently playing back should be
automatically shut down as soon as you switch back
to the TV or another AV channel.
Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD -
Functionality ט on has been selected.
...
Digital Link
Thus you can permit (on) or prohibit (off) automatic
communication between the TV set and external devices
connected to it (e.g. BluRay player) via the HDMI cable. One
of its functions is to switch these devices on and off
alternately.
Digital Link
Remote
Shutdown
Gaming mode
For the inputs of your TV set on which game consoles, PC applications
or even Karaoke machines are operated, we recommend you to acti-
vate the Gaming mode. Your activities are then displayed quicker on
the screen by reducing the complex picture improving techniques.
This mode can be set separately for every input of your TV set.
Call Gaming mode menu
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Connections,
go to next column.
 Select Gaming mode,
OK call.
Select connection,
OK Gaming mode for selected connection on/off.
You can recognise AV connections with set Gaming
mode by the symbol
after the connection name. A
dice icon
is shown in the extended station list behind
the corresponding AV input when filtering on the AV list.
Retour
...
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
PC IN
AVS
AV
VIDEO
...
Gaming
mode
Set Gaming mode for inputs...
Mark/unmark with
For the inputs of your TV set on which game consoles, PC applications or even Karaoke machines are operated, we
recommend you to activate the "Gaming mode". Your activities are then displayed quicker on the screen by reducing
the complex, picture improving techniques. This mode can be set separately for every input of your TV set.
Back
OK
1 HDMI 1
2 HDMI 2
3 HDMI 3
4 HDMI 4
5 PC IN
6 AVS
7 AV
8 VIDEO
HDMI 2
Expanded station list
A..Z < All stations >< AV list >Search
Back
Art 40-60
User guide
117
Devices to the HDMI connections
The HDMI connections (High Definition Multimedia Interface) allow
the transmission of digital video and audio signals from a player (e.g.
DVD player, Blu-ray player, game console, camcorder, set-top box)
via a single cable.
The digital video and audio data are transmitted without data compres-
sion digitally and therefore lose none of their quality.
A maximum of five devices can be connected in cascade to every HDMI
socket. The devices are arranged in the AV list and in the station list
below the appropriate HDMI socket. If the respective device sends
its own device name, this appears in place of the connection name.
Your TV set can show optimally 24p movies, which are output from a
connected HDMI player, e.g., Loewe BluTech Vision 3D.
Digital video signals from a DVI player can be also be reproduced by
the HDMI connection using a DVI/HDMI adaptor cable. The sound
must be piped in additionally (see right column).
HDMI and DVI both use the same copy protection method HDCP.
Connecting the device
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
Connect the device by an HDMI cable (Type A, 19-pole) to one of the
HDMI sockets of the TV set.
An HDMI device is connected to the side HDMI socket (e.g. camcorder)
in the same way as shown in the figure.
Connection example of an HDMI device (e.g. Blu-ray Player)
HDMI
HDMI1
Blu-ray player
TV set
Connecting an external device via HDMI/DVI adaptor
If your external device, e.g., a PC has an HDMI interface, you can also
connect this via an HDMI socket to your TV set.
If a DVI/HDMI adaptor cable is used, the corresponding sound can be
piped through the AUDIO IN socket of the VGA adaptor
(1
to the PC IN
socket on the TV set.
Connecting an external device via HDMI
If your external device has an HDMI interface, the sound signal will
usually be transmitted via the HDMI connection.
If this is not the case, connect the analogue or digital sound as de-
scribed above. Refer to the appropriate operating manual for further
information on the version of the HDMI interface on your external
device, e.g., PC.
Playback from the device
If the device at HDMI supports the Digital Link HD functionality, the
TV set will automatically switch to the corresponding HDMI input after
starting the replay at the HDMI device.
The HDMI input can also be called up manually:
Call AV list.
Select HDMI socket.
With Digital Link HD-capable devices the device
name may possibly appear in place of the connec-
tion name.
OK switch over.
Start playback on the connected HDMI device. The
best possible format for the picture is detected and set
automatically.
2 HDMI 22 HDMI 2
1 HDMI 11 HDMI 1
3 HDMI 33 HDMI 3
4 HDMI 44 HDMI 4
5 PC IN5 PC IN
6 AVS
AV list
Note: If you press for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
OK
External devices
Art 40-60
User guide
118
Operation of Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC) enabled devices
For playback with an external Digital Link HD enabled device connected
to the HDMI socket of the TV set, user commands are transmitted to
the external device with a few exceptions (volume, sound on/off). You
will also be informed by an on-screen display as soon as you switch to
the corresponding HDMI input.
Pressing briefly TV switches to TV mode (back to
previous station).
Pressing TV for a longer period switches between
HDMI and TV operation.
A message on the screen informs you about the
currently selected mode.
Automatically switching off external devices
When returning to TV mode by briefly pressing the TV key (see above)
the external device can be switched off.
You can find the settings in the System settings ט Connections
טDigital Link ט Shutdown of the ext. device via TV-button.
Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD - Functionality ט
on has been selected.
Remote TV switch via Digital Link
You can select whether the TV set is to switch on automatically from
Standby mode if a disc is played or a screen menu displayed on a
Digital Link HD-enabled device.
You can find the settings in the System settings ט Connections ט
Digital Link ט Remote switch on of TV set.
Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD - Functionality ט
on has been selected.
Switching off the TV set and connected devices (system
standby)
The operation of the TV set must be enabled (see above).
Press the key long: TV set and all CEC-enabled devices
connected to the HDMI ports will be switched off to
standby (system standby).
External devices
Digital Link HD
Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC)
The Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC) system operation allows Loewe
television sets to transmit the remote control signals via the HDMI
connection of a TV set to compatible HDMI devices, such as e.g. Lo-
ewe AudioVision. You can therefore set up a concealed CEC capable
HDMI device.
Concealed installation of HDMI devices
To this end, first assign the HDMI CEC function with Code 22 to the
required device key (STB, VIDEO or AUDIO) as described in chapter
External devices, section Setting the remote control for other
Loewe devices.
Now assign the Digital Link HD function to the used HDMI device.
Assign HDMI device
The CEC capable HDMI device is connected to one
of the HDMI sockets of the TV set and switched on.
Press required button for 5 seconds.
A selection menu appears on the TV set.
 Select required device from the list.
OK Accept.
From now on, the commands of the remote control are
communicated from the TV set to the HDMI device, if
the corresponding device button (STB, VIDEO or
AUDIO) has been pressed previously.
Select HDMI device for key
No device
BluTech Vision
Select HDMI device for key Back
Cancel
Art 40-60
User guide
119
Devices on AV
An additional device such as a DVD player, VCR/DVD recorder etc.
can be connected to the TV set by means of an adaptor at the AV
socket. The required Scart adaptor is part of the adaptor set. The
adaptor set is available as an accessory from your Loewe dealer (see
chapter Accessories).
The AV sockets can process different signal types. Which signal type
your accessory device provides can be found in the operating manual
of the appropriate device.
Owing to the large number of AV devices available on the market, we
can only mention a few examples for the connection of accessory
equipment to the AV sockets here.
Remote TV switch on via Digital Link
You can select whether the TV set is to switch on automatically from
Standby mode if a disc is played or a screen menu displayed on a
Digital Link Plus-enabled device connected to AV.
You can find the settings in the System settings ט Connections ט
Digital Link ט Remote switch on of TV set.
Connecting a DVD player to the TV set
A DVD player has been selected in the System settings ט AV
connecting settings ט Device at connection AV.
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
Connect the Scart output of the DVD player to the TV set’s AV socket
using the Scart adaptor
(1
.
Plug the adaptor plug into the AV socket of the TV set so that the arrow
on the plug is visible.
Use a fully equipped Scart cable (available from your dealer) for this.
Playback from AV device
If the device at AV supports the Digital Link Plus functionality or if in
the System settings ט Connections ט AV connecting settingsט
Allow switching voltage ט yes, the TV set will automatically switch
to the corresponding AV input after starting the replay at the AV device.
The AV input can also be called manually, however.
Call AV list.
Select AV,
OK switch over.
Start playback on the connected device.
AV
A
DVD player
TV set
Connection example of a DVD player
8 VIDEO
7 AV
AV list
Note: If you press for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
OK
External devices
(1
Adaptor set is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).
Art 40-60
User guide
120
Connecting a DVD recorder to the TV set
A DVD recorder has been selected in the System settings ט Con-
nections ט AV connecting settings ט Device at connection AV.
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
Connect the Scart output of the DVD player to the TV set’s AV socket
using the Scart adaptor
(1
. Use a fully equipped Scart cable (available
from your dealer) for this.
Plug the adaptor plug into the AV socket of the TV set so that the arrow
on the plug is visible.
If you want to receive and record analogue stations with the receiver
(tuner) built into the recorder, the recorder must be looped into the
aerial cable.
Connect the DVD recorder as shown in the connection example below.
Playback from AV device
Call AV list.
Select AV,
OK switch over.
Start playback on the connected device.
ANT IN
ANT OUT
AV
AV
R
TV
ANT
TV
DVD recorder
TV set
Connection example of a DVD recorder
8 VIDEO
7 AV
AV list
Note: If you press for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
OK
Connecting Camcorder/camera to the tv set
Choose Other equipment in the System settings ט Connec-
tionsטAV connecting settings ט Device at connection AV.
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
Connect the video output of the camcorder to the TV set’s AV so-
cket using the S-video adaptor
(1
. Use the AV cable supplied with the
camcorder for this.
Plug the adaptor plug into the AV socket of the TV set so that the arrow
on the plug is visible.
Depending on the type of plug, an additional cable is required for the
audio connection. Connect the analogue audio signal of the camcor-
der to the S-video adaptor via the jack plug socket.
If your camcorder has an HDMI output, you can also connect the device
to the HDMI socket HDMI4 on the side of the TV set.
Playback from AV device
Call AV list.
Select AVS,
OK switch over.
Start playback on the connected device.
Connection example of a camcorder
AV
Camcorder
TV set
7 PC IN
6 AVS
8 VIDEO
AV list
Note: If you press for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
OK
External devices
(1
Adaptor set is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).
Art 40-60
User guide
121
Devices on PC IN
The AV input PC IN offers the possibility to connect a PC or set-top
box to the TV and thus use the TV screen as the output device.
Connecting PC / Set-top box
When connecting a PC or auxiliary device to the PC IN socket of the
TV set, adjust the output signal on your PC first so that it matches
one of the signals in the table in chapter Technical data, section
Signals via PC IN / HDMI.
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
Connect the PC to the TV set’s PC IN socket with a VGA cable and the
VGA adaptor
(1
. Plug the adaptor plug into the PC IN socket of the TV
set so that the arrow on the plug is visible.
Connect the analogue audio signal of the PC to the VGA adaptor via
the stereo jack socket.
Playback from the device
Call AV list.
Select PC IN,
OK switch over.
Adjusting the geometry of the PC picture
You can set the position (vertical, horizontal) and the phase position of
your PC. The settings you find under System settings ט Pictureט
more ... ט PC IN - Display.
Connection example of a PC
VGAAUDIO
PC IN
PC
TV set
6 AVS
5 PC IN
7 AV
8 VIDEO
AV list
Note: If you press for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
OK
Connecting devices with component connection (YPbPr / YUV)
External units with component connection YPbPr (often informally
referred to as YUV; see also Glossary on page) can be connected to the
PC IN socket of the TV set using two adaptors. In addition to the VGA
adaptor, a component VGA adaptor is required (available in stores).
The other units are connected as described in the left column.
External devices
Art 40-60
User guide
122
Connecting the Audio system
Connect digital audio (pre) amplifier via audio return channel
(HDMI ARC)
Connect the HDMI1 socket of the TV using an HDMI cable with the
HDMI socket of the ARC-compatible audio (pre) amplifier (e.g.Loewe
MediaVision 3D). It is not necessary to log-in the amplifier separately
with the TV set.
The TV sound can be played back via the Media Vision 3D/Subwoofer-
System.
More information on the wiring of the MediaVision 3D, speakers an
the subwoofer you find in the instruction manual of the corresponding
device.
Connecting audio system to the tv set
HDMI1
TV set
Subwoofer
MediaVision 3D
Connecting the HiFi/AV amplifier
Connecting digital HiFi/AV amplifiers
Connect the digital audio output of the TV set SPDIF OUT to the digital
audio input of the amplifier via a cinch cable:
Reproducing sound via an HiFi/AV amplifier
The sound reproduction via connected HiFi/AV amplifier can be
adjusted in the sound components wizard (see chapter System
settings, section Connections – Sound components).
Connection example of a digital amplifiers
DIGITAL IN
SPDIF
OUT
Digital amplifier
TV set
External devices
Art 40-60
User guide
123
External devices
Audio playback from external devices
Connect external AV devices (e.g., MP3 player, DVD player) for sound
reproduction to the AV input of the TV set.
Connecting an external appliance (e.g. MP3 player)
Connect the output (jack receptacle) of the MP3 player via S-video
adaptor
(1
to the AV socket of the TV set.
Plug the adaptor plug into the AV socket of the TV set so that the arrow
on the plug is visible.
Select AV input
The selection of the AV input for a device at the AV socket (con-
nection as described above) is describe here as an example. The
procedure is similar to the selection of the other AV inputs.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark Extras,
OK call Extras.
 Mark AV list,
OK call AV selection.
Mark desired AV source,
OK switch to AV source.
Start playback on the external device after selecting
the AV input.
Only playback of the audio signal from the AV source (screen
is off)
To play only the sound of a connected media player (e.g. MP3 player),
the AV sources can be selected so that the screen goes blank.
Switching off the screen reduces the power consumption of the
TV set.
Open the AV station list.
Select desired connection,
OK press at least for two seconds.
Connection example of an MP3 player
AV
MP3 player
TV set
2 HDMI 22 HDMI 2
1 HDMI 11 HDMI 1
3 HDMI 33 HDMI 3
4 HDMI 44 HDMI 4
5 PC IN5 PC IN
6 AVS
AV list
Note: If you press for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
OK
Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12)
You can connect either the Loewe Individual Sound Projector ID or a
home network system of different manufacturers (e.g. AMX, Crestron)
to your TV set via the RS-232C (RJ12) interface.
As to the configuration of the RS-232C (RJ12) interface and for further
information on the various home networking systems contact your
dealer please.
(1
Adapter set is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).
Art 40-60
User guide
124
Operating Loewe units
Using the remote control for the TV mode of the TV set
Press the TV key, the LED above it will light for approx.
5 seconds.
Using the remote control for a Loewe recorder
Press the STB key, the LED above it will light for approx.
5 seconds.
Using the remote control for a Loewe player
Press the VIDEO key, the LED above it will light for
approx. 5 seconds.
Using the remote control for the radio mode of the TV set
Press the AUDIO key, the display above it will light for
approx. 5 seconds.
As long as a key is pressed, the LED for the selected operating mode
lights up (TVSTBVIDEOAUDIO). This allows you to check
which operating mode the remote control is set to every time you
press a button.
The factory setting of the keys is described above (see also table in
right hand column). The assignment of the buttons can be changed
to suit the existing accessory devices (see right hand column).
Set unit for sound control function on the remote control
The keys for the sound control functions Volume (
10
)
and Sound on/off
(
1
)
are programmed ex-factory to interact with the TV set. The unit to
be operated can be modified.
The device must first be placed on one of the device key of the
remote control (see right column) before the tone-control functions
can be changed to the appropriate device.
Press the TV key and the numerical key simultane-
ously for minimum 5 seconds. The LED above the
selected TV key flashes twice.
Function Buttons Unit
Audio
Functions
TV + 3 Auro/AudioVision/MediaVision 3D
TV + 4 Mediacenter
TV + 5 Loewe TV
TV + 6 Loewe TV with sound projector with-
out system connection
Setting the remote control for other Loewe devices
You can operate various Loewe devices with the remote control. The
device keys STBVIDEOAUDIO can be reassigned to operate
different Loewe devices.
Press the required device key and the STOP key
simultaneously for 5 sec. until the corresponding LED
display flashes twice.
Then enter the two-digit device code from the list below.
The corresponding LED indicator light flashes twice.
Unit Code Factory setting
Loewe ViewVision 8106 H 10
Loewe Viewvision, Centros 21x2 12
Loewe ViewVision DR
+
DVB-T 13
Loewe Auro 2216 PS/8116 DT 14
Loewe BluTech Vision Interactive 15
Loewe Sound Projector 17
SetTopBox (STB) data base 18 STB
Loewe TV - Digital radio 19 Audio
Loewe Mediacenter 20
Loewe BluTech Vision 3D 21 VIDEO
HDMI CEC mode 22
Loewe AudioVision 24
Loewe Individual Sound Projector ID 25
Apple IR codes 26
Apple IR codes (Apple TV-2G) 27
Loewe Soundbox 28
Loewe SoundVision 29
Loewe AirSpeaker 30
Loewe Soundport 31
Loewe MediaVision 3D 35
Restore defaults 99
The codes shown here only apply to direct operation of the auxiliary
device device.
The available codes may vary depending on the status of the firm-
ware in the remote control.
External devices
Art 40-60
User guide
125
Teaching the remote control
Teaching the remote control
By means of key code 18 (Set-Top Box data base) your remote control
Assist may be taught for your Set-Top Box (e.g., decoder, external cable
tuner). Thus, you spare yourself the use of several remote controls.
For the use of 2-digit key codes see chapter External devices,
section Operating Loewe units.
The following options are available for teach-in:
- Entering a 3-digit code number
- Set-Top Box read-out
- Teaching individual keys
- Delete learned codes
In the following, the STB key is dealt with as an example since
device code 18 is preset for this key ex-works. Code 18 may also be
assigned to the AUDIO and RADIO keys; the following description
applies accordingly.
Entering a 3-digit code number
The STB key can be programmed directly by means of a device-
dependent 3-digit code. You find a list of these codes in chapter Code
page at the end of this instruction manual.
Keep the STB and OK keys depressed for five seconds.
The LED above the STB key flashes twice.
Enter the 3-digit code from the list. The LED above the
STB key lights up for 1 second.
OK end the programming mode. After a successful
programming the LED flashes twice.
When entering a wrong code number, the LED lights
up for 2 seconds. Do this programming once again.
Read-out of programmed Set-Top Box
The code of the currently programmed device on the STB key can be
indicated by the remote control.
Keep the STB and OK keys depressed for five seconds.
The LED above the STB key flashes twice.
Press INFO key.
The LED above the STB key shows the programmed
code by flashing. The figure "0" will be indicated by
flashing 5 times.
Teaching individual keys
All keys (except the TV, STB, VIDEO and AUDIO device keys as well
as the V+/- keys
and ) can be taught for the operation of units
which are not contained in the integrated data base. The functions of
the selected button are then completely or partially overwritten with
the new codes.
Place the TV remote control and the remote control to be replaced
in such a way that the infrared windows face each other at a distance
of 1-5 cm (see sketch).
Keep the STB and the red key simultaneously
depressed for five seconds. The LED above the STB
key lights up permanently.
Press key to be taught on the TV remote control.
The LED above the STB key flashes.
On the original remote control press the button
which is to be taught.
The LED above the selected STB key flashes twice.
If the code is not correctly recognised, the LED above
the STB key flashes ten times. Then repeat your entry
on the original remote control. If necessary correct the
allocation of the two remote controls. Continue with
the other buttons as described above.
To end the teaching mode, press the STB key again.
After 10 seconds without an entry the teaching mode
is automatically terminated.
It is possible that not all remote control codes can
be taught.
You can make a note of the functions, which you
have allocated to the keys, on the notes pages at the
end of this instruction manual.
1-5 cm
Art 40-60
User guide
126
Teaching the remote control / Loewe Apps
Deleting individual key functions
You can delete the taught function of an individual button.
Press STB and green key simultaneously for five
seconds. The LED above the STB key lights up perma-
nently.
Press key to be deleted on the TV remote control.
The LED above the STB key flashes twice.
Continue with the deletion of other buttons as
described above.
To end the deletion mode, press the STB key again.
The LED above the STB key flashes once.
Deleting all functions of the key for a device
You can delete all taught functions which you have set on the STB key.
Press STB and yellow key simultaneously for five
seconds. The LED above the STB key flashes twice.
Deleting all functions of the keys for all devices
You can delete all taught functions which you have set on the TV, STB,
VIDEO or AUDIO buttons.
Press STB and blue key simultaneously for five
seconds. The LEDs above the keys for the devices flash
twice.
Loewe Apps
Loewe provides various Apps for your mobile devices:
Loewe Internet Radio App
Loewe Internet Radio App provides you with the Internet radio
offers of vTuner for your Apple products iPhone, iPad or iPod touch
(from iOS 3.0). Your personal settings such as the vTuner favourites
are synchronised with those of the TV set after registering your Apple
product via the Loewe Support homepage.
Loewe VideoNet App
The Loewe VideoNet App enables free and direct access to the
best videos in the Web. The App streams live Podcasts, Screencasts
and Web-Shows without loop route onto your iPad. You can use the
Favourites function to add videos to your personal favourites list with
just one click. In this way you can watch the latest episodes live. You
can use the “Send-to-TV” function to sent selected videos to your
Loewe TV set and play them there.
This App is available for Apple iPad (from iOS 3.2) via the Appstore.
To use the full functionality, you need to connect the VideoNet App on
your TV set (can be found in the MediaNet area) and the VideoNet App
of your iPad to each other (pairing). You can find a precise description
of the steps necessary in the instructions of the iPad-App under the
point Pairing.
Loewe Assist Media App
The Loewe Assist Media App is a powerful App, which can not only
replace your remote control in your home network, but also EPG and
DR+ archive provided by the TV set to your iPad. You can also transfer
the station list of your TV set to your iPad, programme timer entries,
start an immediate recording and add personal favourites to the start
screen of the App.
In the course of the Loewe Assist Media app, the keyboard of your
iPad can be used with restrictions for inputting text on the screen
(e.g. in the browser). Text which has been input is moved to the TV
set after confirmation.
This App is available for Apple iPad (iOS 4.0 or higher) via the Appstore.
Art 40-60
User guide
127
Loewe Apps
Overview of the prerequisites for the use of the Assist Media
app for the Apple iPad
1. WLAN router and home network
A WLAN router must be connected and installed.
2. The Loewe TV set is connected to the home network via LAN
/ WLAN
Your reach the network setting of the Loewe TV set
via HOME view טSystem settings ט Multimedia
/ Networkט Network settings ט Networking.
Select whether the TV device should be connected to
the Internet using a LAN (cable) or WLAN (wireless)
connection. Here you also see the name of the network
and the IP address of the TV set. This address will be
indicated in the Assist Media App (Settings ט Con-
nect) and is used to make a difference between the
devices registered in the network.
3. A digital Cable / Satellite connection (DVB-C/-S) is available
Loewe recommend a DVB-C- or DVB-S connection of
your TV set. You have the possibility to fully use the
Assist Media App for iPad. In case of analogue TV
reception, Assist Media cannot fully use the EPG,
for instance.
4. The DR+ Streaming settings are checked
Please set in the DR+ Streaming settings under
HOME טSystem settings ט Control ט more ...ט
DR+ ט DR+ Streaming the first two items Share
DR+ archive with other devices and Also use other
archives to yes.
In the DR+ Streaming setting you can also set the
name of the TV set under which it will be displayed in
the App. After renaming please switch the TV set off
and on again using the power switch.
.
...
End with
...
Networking
Current settings:
Networking Wired
IP configuration Automatic
Additional information:
IP address 172.16.10.201
Subnet mask 255.255.0.0
Gateway 172.16.0.1
DNS server 1 172.16.0.1
DNS server 2 192.168.1.1
MAC address 00:09:82:17:73:52
NETWORKING WIZARD - Network status
Proceed with
...
DR+
Streaming
Share DR+ ar-
DR+ device
name
Notify start-
DR+ device
group name
IP port
number
DR+ standby
If you select "yes" here, you will make the DR+ archive of
your TV set available to any other TV sets and UPnP clients
equipped with this feature. They will then be able to access
the archive over your home network.
5. Creating an Apple ID
If it has not been done yet, create a user account (Apple
ID) on your iPad in the Settings under item iTunes &
App Stores.
Follow the instructions.
You can then download the Loewe Assist Media App
for iPad from the App Store.
Art 40-60
User guide
128
Loewe Apps
6. Install Loewe Assist Media App
Open the App Store.
Enter the keyword Loewe in the browse list on the right
above. Start searching by pressing on Search.
Install the Assist Media App by pressing on FOR
FREE. Follow the instructions on the installation of
the app.
7. Install the Assist Media App
Activate the location services for the apps Assist
Media and Maps in your iPad under Settings ט Data
protection ט Location service. This is essential for
using country-specific functions. Thus, you can use
the maxdome video service, for example.
Open the Assist Media app on your iPad. It scans your
home network for Loewe TV sets. Follow the instruc-
tions and select the desired TV set.
In another step, you choose which station list the
app shall load: the unsorted main list or one of your
personal lists. Thereafter, loading of the EPG starts.
The app is available to you after a few minutes of load-
ing time. Further EPG data packages are loaded in the
background.
Art 40-60
User guide
129
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible cause Remedy / Instructions
The TV set switches off automatically. The automatic shutdown switches off the
TV set to save energy after 4 hours of inacti-
vity as soon as at least one signal input group
is set up in the energy efficient mode Home
Mode.
Using automatic shutdown is recommended
for the purposes of energy saving and safety.
All menus are displayed in the wrong langu-
age.
The menu language was set incorrectly. Set the menu language:
Press HOME key. Call last menu item
(bot-
tom left). Mark the fourth item from above in the
following list and move to next column to the
right. Call first list item with OK. Select the lan
-
guage and confirm it with OK.
General problems when connecting external
devices via an AV input.
The Signal type is set incorrectly. Set the correct signal type (System settings
ט Connections ט AV connection settings
טSignal type).
If AV standard or Signal type is set to
Automatic then this can lead to false detec-
tions with non-standard signals. In this case
standard and signal must be set according to
the information in the operating manual of the
external device.
With Teletext various characters are displa-
yed incorrectly.
The wrong character set has been set in the
System settings.
Set the correct character set: System set-
tings ט Control ט more ... ט Standard
Teletext ט Character set ט Standard or
select the appropriate character set.
Errors occurred when running a CA module. Switch the TV set off. Remove the CA-module
from the TV set. Wait a few seconds. Reinsert
the CA module. Switch the TV set on again.
No sound via the external digital audio am-
plifier.
The external digital audio amplifier does not
support the selected sound format (Dolby
Digital, dts, MPEG).
Set PCM stereo on the DVD player in the
sound selection. For DVB stations switch
Language/Sound
A programmed recording was not made. The provider deleted the programme from
the EPG data, for example due to a pro-
gramme change.
The station from which the recording was
made does not support automatic time
control (Accurate Recording).
Only the broadcasting organisations are re-
sponsible for transmitting data for the auto-
matic time control. The availability of the
appropriate data cannot be guaranteed.
There is no start or end of a programmed
recording although the automatic time
control
(Accurate Recording) was used.
The transmission time of the program was
delayed and the channel from which the recor-
ding was made has not updated the data.
Only the broadcasting organisations are re-
sponsible for transmitting data for the auto-
matic time control. The availability of the
appropriate data cannot be guaranteed.
No IP address will be issued to your TV set in
spite of automatic IP configuration.
No DHCP server is working on your network. Set up a DHCP server.
Assign the IP addresses for the TV set manu-
ally.
Despite video or music file being played back,
no sound can be heard.
a) The TV set is set to mute or the volume has
been turned down too much.
b) An audio device that does not exist or that
is not connected, is registered under
System settings ט Connections ט
Sound components (e.g., HiFi/AV am-
plifier).
a) Increase the volume by pressing the V+ key
on the remote control for a longer time. This
will also cancel any mute setting.
b) Connect the audio device and switch it on.
In the Sound components wizard change
back to TV speakers.
Art 40-60
User guide
130
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible cause Remedy / Instructions
Although the file is visible on the media server,
it is not displayed in the MediaPortal.
The file is not made available by your media
server.
Change to your media server. For this, also
read the chapter Technical data, section
Media – Media server software.
A media file that is displayed can not be played
back.
The format of the file is not supported (see also
limitations in chapter Technical data, section
Media – File formats supported.
No remedy.
Characters received in the WLAN code of the
wireless router cannot be entered for the
network configuration at the TV set.
The device does not support all special cha-
racters.
Change the WLAN key of the router.
When searching for wireless routers, no de-
vice is found.
The router is not ready for wireless commu-
nication.
Check your wireless router.
Try to make the connection again a few mi-
nutes later.
Should there be any interference during wireless network operation such as disruptions during playback or slow reactions by devices to
commands, you could try the following:
- Keep at least three metres distance from microwave ovens, bluetooth devices, mobile telephones and Wi-Fi compatible devices such as
printers and PDAs.
- Change the active channel on the WiFi Router.
Art 40-60
User guide
131
Technical data
Type Art 60 Art 50 Art 40
Part number 52437xxx 52436xxx 52435xxx
Device dimensions without stand (W x H x D)
Device dimensions with stand (W x H x D)
139,2 x 85,8 x 6,8
139,2 x 89,6 x 35,2
114,9 x 71,4 x 6,3
114,9 x 75,3 x 25,4
90,9 x 57,4 x 6,2
90,9 x 61,7 x 25,4
Weight without stand (approximate)
Weight with stand (approximate)
30,0 kg
34,3 kg
20,2 kg
23,2 kg
12,8 kg
15,8 kg
Display technology Full HD LCD with edge LED backlight technology
Screen diagonal / Picture format 152 cm / 16:9 127 cm / 16:9 98 cm / 16:9
Resolution / Motion Response 1920 x 1080 px / 200 Hz
Contrast (static / dynamic) 5.000 : 1 / 5.000.000 : 1 3.500 : 1 / 3.500.000 : 1
Viewing angle (horizontal / vertical) 176° / 17
Power consumption On-Mode max.
(Audio output 1/8 of the maximum value)
Power consumption On-Mode (Home)
Power consumption in Standby Mode
Power consumption when set is switched off
152 W
108 W
< 0,5 W
0 W
97 W
73 W
< 0,5 W
0 W
68 W
51 W
< 0,5 W
0 W
Ambient temperature 5° C – 35° C
Relative humidity (non-condensing) 20 – 80%
Air pressure 800 – 1114 hPa (0 – 2000 m above sea level)
Chassis designation: SL 210
Power supply: 220 V – 240 V/50–60 Hz
Tuner: terr./cable:
Satellite:
VHF/Hyperband/UHF
4 levels: 13/18V/22kHz / 16 levels: DiSEqC 1.0 / single-cable system: EN 50494
Range: terr./cable:
Satellite:
Terr./cable: 45 MHz up to 860 MHz
Satellite: 950 MHz up to 2150 MHz
Station storage locations incl. AV and radio: 6000
TV standards: analogue:
digital:
B/G, I, L, D/K, M, N
DVB-T/T2, DVB-C, DVB-S/S2
Colour standards: SECAM, PAL, NTSC, NTSC-V, PAL-V (60 Hz)
Sound standards: analogue:
BG, DK, MN:
BG, I, DK:
L, L1:
digital:
Mono, Stereo, Dual channel
FM-A2
FM-Nicam
AM-Nicam
Mono, Stereo, Dual channel, PCM,
Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital Pulse
Audio output power (sine/music): 2 x 20W / 2 x 40W
Teletext: TOP
FLOF
Page memory: 1000
Technical Data
Art 40-60
User guide
132
Function of the connections
The following table shows the name, type and function of the ports.
Designation Type Function / Signal
Mains socket 220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz Supply voltage
RJ12 Data I/O: serial interface
Mini AV
Video IN:
Audio IN:
with S-Video adaptor:
with VGA adaptor:
Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)
CVBS (VHS/8 mm)
PC/STB video signal
Component (YPbPr)
L/R
IEC socket 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80 mA:
Antenna (analogue) / Cable (analogue) /
DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C
F socket 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 400 mA: ANT-SAT DVB-S/S2
Cinch (orange) SPDIF OUT: Digital audio output
HDMI4
HDMI type A (4x)
Digital Video/Audio IN
(HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3,
HDMI4):
Digital Audio OUT
(HDMI1 via HDMI ARC):
Digital video and audio
RJ-45 Ethernet / Fast Ethernet: Network interface
USB type A (3x) USB 2.0 (max. 500 mA): Multimedia files/software update
Mini AV
Video IN:
Audio IN:
with scart adaptor: Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)
CVBS (VHS/8 mm)
RGB
L/R
Jack 3.5 mm Headphones 32200 Ohm
CI Slot Common Interface: Slot for CA module
Technical Data
Art 40-60
User guide
133
Media
File formats supported
Pictures: JPEG, PNG
Audio: MP3, M4A (AAC LC), WMA (without lossless), FLAC, WAV
(PCM)
Video: AVI (MPEG-1/2, XviD, AC3, MP3), WMV (WMV9, VC-1,
WMA9, WMA Pro), MP4 (XviD, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC
LC), MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC), MKV (H.264/
MPEG-4 AVC, AC3), FLV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.263,
MP3, AAC LC), MPG (MPEG-1, MPEG Audio), TS/PS
(MPEG-2, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG2 Audio, AC3), VOB
(MPEG-2, MPEG2 Audio, AC3)
H.264/MPEG-4 AVC upto Profil High (Level 4.2)
Ethernet (wired network)
Supported standards: 10 Mbit/sec Ethernet (10Base-T), 100 Mbit/sec
Fast Ethernet (100Base-T)
WLAN (wireless network)
Standards supported:
IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Frequency range used:
2400-2483,5 MHz and 5180-5730 MHz
Types of encoding that are supported:
WEP 64 and 128 Bit (ASCII and HEX), WPA PSK, WPA2 AES
Supported home network standard
Universal Plug and Play Audio / Video (UPnP AV)
Media server software
To play multimedia contents from devices in your home network, you
require media server software which makes the relevant files available
to you. Handling of individual files depends on the technical properties
and also on the media server software used.
You can download a test version of the TwonkyMedia Mediaserver from
our homepage. With your TV set, you have also acquired the option of
obtaining a free licence for the currently available version of the Twonky
media server. Alternatively, you can also use other media servers, e.g.,
the Windows Media Player (WMP) from Version 11.
For communication with your PC, certain port addresses of the
network connection are required. They may not be blocked by a firewall
if there is one, otherwise this could cause serious connection errors.
Windows Media Player 11 requires the port addresses 1900 and the
block of 10280 up to and including 10284 (all for UDP) as well as 2869
and 10243 (both for TCP). For TwonkyMedia the port addresses 1030,
1900 and 9080 (all for UDP) and 9000 (for TCP) must be available.
Other ports to be kept free depend on the operating system you are
using.
Contact your network administrator about configuring the firewall.
Technical Data
Art 40-60
User guide
134
Signals via PC IN / HDMI
The following table lists the compatible signals which your TV set can
show via the PC IN connection or via the HDMI connections (HDMI1,
HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4).
Set the output signal on your PC, HDMI or DVI device so that it matches
one of the signals in the table.
Format Horizontal x Vertical Frame
frequency
connec-
tion
480i60 720 x 480i 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
576i50 720 x 576i 50Hz PC IN, HDMI
480p60 720 x 480p 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
576p50 720 x 576p 50Hz PC IN, HDMI
1440 x 480p 60Hz HDMI
1440 x 576p 50Hz HDMI
720p50 1280 x 720p 50Hz PC IN, HDMI
720p60 1280 x 720p 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
1080i50 1920 x 1080i 50Hz PC IN, HDMI
1080i60 1920 x 1080i 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
1080p24 1920 x 1080p 24Hz PC IN, HDMI
1080p25 1920 x 1080p 25Hz PC IN, HDMI
1080p30 1920 x 1080p 30Hz PC IN, HDMI
1080p50 1920 x 1080p 50Hz PC IN, HDMI
1080p60 1920 x 1080p 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
VGA 640 x 480 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
SVGA 800 x 600 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
XGA 1024 x 768 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
WXGA 1360 x 768 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
SXGA 1280 x 1024 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
Technical Data
Signal input groups
In your TV set the signals are sorted in various signal input groups
according to their source. In addition to the source, the type of signal
is also distinguished.
For each signal input group, there are individual values for the picture
settings.
Signal
group name
Signal source/Signal type
SD Analog
cable analogue, interfaces AV, PC IN (SD)
SD Digital
DVB (SD), DR+ (SD), MPEG-Encoder
SD Media
Player
full screen display of SD videos via USB, Network,
VOD and media centre (incl. HbbTV media centre)
SD HDMI
Playback of SD video via HDMI, e.g., DVD player
HD Analog
PC IN (HD)
HD Digital
DVB (HD), DR+ (HD)
HD Media
Player
full screen display of HD videos via USB, Network,
VOD and media centre (incl. HbbTV media centre)
HD HDMI
Playback of HD videos via HDMI, e.g., Blu-Ray player
3D HD
3D playback of HD videos (analogue or digital)
3D SD
3D playback of SD videos (analogue or digital)
3D Media
Player
full screen display of 3D videos (SD/HD) via USB,
Network, VOD and media centre (incl. HbbTV media
centre)
3D HDMI
Playback of 3D videos via HDMI, e.g., 3D Blu-Ray
player
Photo Player
Playback of Photos via USB and network
Browser
Display of Web sites in the Browser (incl. Media apps)
VGA
PC IN (PC) or HDMI (PC)
Art 40-60
User guide
135
Accessories
The following accessories are obtainable from your Loewe dealer.
Mounting options:
A variety of options for mounting your TV set on the floor, table, and
wall are available.
An overview of the available placement options can be found in the
chapter accessories, section placement options.
Loewe 3D Blu-ray player:
With the Loewe Blu-ray player BluTech Vision 3D you’re fully kitted
out to watch Blu-ray discs with 2D and 3D material. With the Loewe
system integration you control BluTech Vision 3D and your Loewe TV
set simultaneously using the Assist remote control.
Loewe MediaVision 3D:
Loewe MediaVision 3D is partly an audio system: It plays your favourite
sound via the integrated iPod/iPhone dock and automatically identi-
fies songs or film music with the MusicID function. Loewe MediaVi-
sion 3D is also a home cinema system, ensuring a perfect all-round
audio visual experience - thanks to the fast and precise Full-HD 3D
Blu-ray drive and a 5.1 decoder. Not least, Loewe MediaVision 3D is a
colourful feast for the eyes: because it can be beautifully customised
by individual intarsia.
Loewe 3D glasses (part. no. 71133082):
The Loewe 3D shutter Active 3D Glasses give you clear 3D enjoyment
and are compatible with all Loewe 3D flat screen TVs.
Loewe Assist Easy:
The reduced focused design of Loewe Assist Easy remote control
guarantees survey at first sight, nevertheless all important functions
are controllable with one hand. Therefore it is the optimal control centre
of the new user interface Loewe Assist Media. As a multifunctional
remote control it is able to control further Loewe products in addition.
Loewe Vesa adaptor bolts M8x32 (part. no. 90458957):
Mounting a Loewe flatscreen TV set to a holder according to the VESA
standard necessarily requires the use of Loewe Vesa adaptor bolts
to prevent damage to the TV set.
The Loewe Vesa adaptor bolts are fastened with a torque of about
4 Nm on the TV set. If you use a Vesa mounting options from other
manufacturers, you can order the Vesa adapter bolts at your author-
ized dealer of Loewe.
Upgrade kits / conversion kits / cables
USB extension (part no. 70167080):
To ensure the accessibility of the USB connections or to be able to
insert USB sticks with a large housing, a USB extension can be con-
nected to the TV set. You can purchase the USB extension via your
Loewe dealer.
Adaptor Set AV SL 2xx (part no. 71678080):
The Loewe adaptor set contains three AV adaptors: The Loewe Scart
adaptor allows you to extend your TV set by adding an AV socket
to connect, e.g., DVD players or DVD recorders. The VGA adaptor
enables the connection of a PC monitor or a Set-top box. By means
of the S-video adaptor you connect your video camera to the TV set.
Additionally to the video inputs, the adaptors for VGA and S-video
are equipped with a 3.5mm stereo jack socket for analogue sound.
Adapter Mini-Scart/25cm/Scart (part no. 71480080):
The Loewe scart adaptor allows you to extend your TV set by adding
an AV socket to connect, e.g., DVD players or DVD recorders.
Adapter RJ12/2.5m/RS232C (part no. 70499081):
Adapterkabel von RJ12 auf 9 poligen Sub-D Stecker zur Integration
des TV-Gerätes in professionelle Home Automation Systeme, wie z.B.
von GIRA, CRESTRON, AMX.
Accessories
Subject to availability.
Art 40-60
User guide
136
Equipment variants
The equipment of the individual set variants and their upgrade/conversion possibilities is listed in the table below.
Set variants Art 60 Art 50 Art 40
DR
+
–––
USB Recording
zzz
DVB-T/C Single
zzz
DVB-T/C Twin
–––
DVB-T2 Single
zzz
DVB-T2 Twin
–––
DVB-S/S2 Single
zzz
DVB-S/S2 Twin
–––
Digital audio decoder
–––
HbbTV
zzz
WLAN
zzz
RJ12
zzz
IR Link
–––
Accessories
z
ex factory
{
optionally available as an upgrade kit
not available
Art 40-60
User guide
137
Mounting options
Accessories
(1
Only in connection with appropriate adapter to be ordered separately.
(2
Only in connection with VESA Size 400 an adapter.
(3
Depending on the rack system in connection with appropriate adapter to be ordered separately.
Art 60: VESA Size 400 (71361T10)
Art 50: VESA Size 400 (71361T10)
Art 40: VESA Size 200 (71389T00)
Art 60: 71915W00
Art 50: 71915W00
Art 40: 71915W00
Art 60: 71333B00
Art 50: 71333B00
Art 40: 71333B00
Art 60: 71333B00 + 71365T00
Art 50: 71333B00 + 71365T00
Art 40: 71333B00 + 71365T00
Art 60: 65486B10
Art 50: 65486B10
Art 40: 65486B10
Art 40: 71277B00
Art 60: 71363B00
Art 50: 71363B00
Art 40: 71363B00
Art 50: 71384B00
Art 40: 71384B00
Wall Mount Isoflex 32-55
(2
Wall Mount WM 66
Table Stand Connect ID Comfort
Table Stand
Wall Mount Slim/Vesa Size
Floor Stand Universal
(1
Floor Stand Connect ID 32-55
Screen Lift Plus
(1
Wall Stand Flex
(1
Loewe Rack
(3
Art 60: 71355B00
Art 50: 71355B00
Art 40: 71355B00
Art 60: As delivered state
Art 50: As delivered state
Art 40: As delivered state
Art 40 / Art 50: Various designs, sizes and colors
suitable for Loewe TV sets, Sound components
and Equipment
Floor Stand Connect ID 32-55 with Equipmentboard
Art 40-60
User guide
138
Environment / Legal information
Environmental protection
Energy consumption
Your TV set is equipped with an eco-standby power supply. In the
standby mode, the power consumption drops to low power (see
chapter Technical Data). If you want to save even more energy then
switch the device off with the mains switch. Please also note that
the EPG data (Electronic Programme Guide) is lost under certain
circumstances and possibly programmed timer recordings cannot
be carried out via the TV set.
The TV set will be completely separated from mains only when you
unplug the mains cable.
The power consumed by the TV set during operation depends on the
energy efficiency preset in the initial installation or on the setting in
the System settings.
If you activate the automatic dimming, your TV picture will adapt to
the ambient brightness. This reduces the power consumption of the
TV set.
If the TV is not operated for 4 hours (adjustment of volume, pro-
gramme change, etc.) the TV will automatically switch to stand-by
mode to save energy. A prompt to terminate this shutdown process
appears one minute before expiry of the 4 hours. The automatic
shutdown is only active in the energy efficiency mode Home Mode.
Cardboard box and packaging
You have made a decision to purchase a high-quality technical product
with a long service life. For disposal of the packaging, in accordance
with national legislation we have paid a fee to a commissioned recycler
to pick up the packaging from the dealer.
The device
The EU directive 2002/96/EC regulates the proper
way to recycle, handle and utilise used electronic de-
vices. Old electronic appliances must therefore be
disposed of separately. Never dispose of this device
in normal domestic waste!
You can hand in your old unit free of charge at identified
collection points or to your dealer if you buy a similar new unit. Other
details about reacceptance (also for non-EU countries) are available
from your local administration.
Batteries
The batteries supplied as initial equipment do not con-
tain any pollutants such as cadmium, lead, or mercury.
In accordance with the Battery Directive, used batter-
ies should no longer be disposed of in the domestic
waste. Dispose of your batteries at no charge in the
collection containers which are set up for this pur-
pose in retail stores.
Licences
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro
Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
This set contains a software which is based partly on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
iPad, iPhone, iPod are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the USA
and other countries.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org).
This software is provided by the OpenSSL project as is“ and any
expressed or implied warranties, including, but not limited to,
the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a par-
ticular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the OpenSSL
project or its contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, inci-
dental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including,
but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss
of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused
and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or
tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the
use of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.
com).
This product contains software which was developed by third parties
and / or software which is subject to GNU General Public License (GPL)
and/or GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). You can pass on
and modify them in accordance with Version 2 of the GNU General
Public License or optionally every later version which is published by
the Free Software Foundation.
The publication of this program by Loewe is carried out WITHOUT ANY
GUARANTEE OR SUPPORT, particularly without an implicit guarantee
concerning MARKET MATURITY or the USABILITY FOR A SPECIFIC
PURPOSE. Details can be found in the GNU General Public License. You
can obtain the software via the Loewe customer service department.
The GNU General Public License can be downloaded from:
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.
®
Art 40-60
User guide
139
Glossary
0-9
24p motion picture display: Movies released on Blu-ray Disc sup-
port the 24p motion picture display. The Blu-ray player transfers the
original film format to the television with 24 frames per second. The
DMM (DigitalMovieMode) set in the factory calculates and inserts
additional intermediate pictures, which suppress film jerking typical
for the cinema, thereby providing for a smooth motion sequence.
A
Accurate Recording: See Automatic time control.
Administrator: Person who administers the network, i.e. takes care of
setting up and maintaining all components belonging to the network.
Active antenna: An antenna with its own power supply or amplification
which can improve the reception in areas with a poor coverage.
ARC: Abbreviation for Audio Return Channel.
Audio Return Channel: The audio return channel which was introduced
with the HDMI Standard 1.4 is used when an audio system with audio
(pre) amplifier, e.g. Loewe MediaVision 3D, is connected to a TV set via
HDMI. The digital audio signal of the TV set (e.g. the sound of the cur-
rent TV program) can be transferred to the audio amplifier via the audio
return channel of the HDMI cable. Thus the same cable which is normally
responsible for transferring image data from a connected media player to
the TV set transfers the audio data in the opposite direction. In this way, the
audio return channel makes the cinch cable, which has previously been
required in addition to the HDMI cable, redundant.
Automatic time control: Also called Accurate Recording. Similar to
VPS for analogue stations the automatic time control monitors the start
and end times of programmes from DVB stations. If these times deviate
from the data programmed in the timer data, the running time of the
recording is adapted automatically. The automatic time control is not
supported by all DVB stations.
AV socket: Socket for audio and video signals.
AV sources: Audio/Video source.
AVI: Abbreviation for Audio Video Interleave, a video container file for-
mat developed by Microsoft. A single AVI video file can contain several
audio, video and text data streams (thus the name container format).
AVS: Audio/video sockets on the side of the TV set (cinch and mini-
DIN).
B
Band: Name for a transmission range.
Blu-ray Disc: The follow-up format of DVD. The contents of about
five DVDs fit onto one Blu-ray Disc (abbreviated BD). Therefore, the
Blu-ray disc provides enough space for high-resolution images and
multi-channel sound formats.
C
BMP: Abbreviation for Bitmap, a grid graphics format designed for
Microsoft Windows and OS/2 that is wide spread and therefore sup-
ported by almost every popular graphics software package without
any problems.
C
CA Module: The Conditional Access module contains the cod-
ing system and compares the transmitted code with the one on the
Smart Card. If they match, the appropriate stations or programmes
are decoded.
CEC: Abbreviation for Consumer Electronics Control. CEC provides uni-
versal component control functions for entertainment electronics devices
(e.g. System standby, One Touch Play). CEC is referred to by Loewe as
Digital Link HD.
Channel (WLAN): Devices that want to communicate with each other
have to use the same WiFi channel. In Europe the WiFi frequency band
is currently divided into 13 channels.
Cinch cable: Cable for transmitting sound or pictures.
CI slot: See Common Interface.
Client: Also called network client, describes an end device such as
your TV set that is connected to the network and gets data from a
(media) server to make it accessible to the user.
Common Interface: The Common Interface (CI slot) is a standard-
ised interface. By inserting suitable decoding modules (CA modules)
and a Smart Card coded digital programmes can be used.
Common Interface Plus: CI Plus is an advancement of the Common
Interface standard. CI Plus slots are in principle downward compatible
to the previous CI standard, i.e. CA modules and Smart Cards accord-
ing to the past CI standard can continue to be used in CI Plus slots,
as far as the programme provider permits this. Additionally, extended
regulations apply however to CI Plus.
Component: See Component connection.
Component connection: Also referred to as Component. Connec-
tion where the video signal is transferred via three separate (Cinch)
connections. It comprises the brightness signal Y as well as the colour
difference signals Pb (blue component) and Pr (red component).
Conditional Access module: See CA module.
D
Decoder: Analogue, coded TV signals are passed through a decoder
and made visible again.
DHCP: Abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. DHCP
allows automatic assignment of IP addresses with the aid of a DHCP
server.
DHCP server: Network service which takes care of automatic assign-
ment of IP addresses to clients.
Digital Link HD: System for controlling units via the HDMI connection
of the Loewe TV set when they have been set up in a covered position.
DMM: Abbreviation for Digital Movie Mode. Whether a studio record-
ing, live broadcast, or feature film – the broadcast images are always
displayed optimally. Still images are reproduced in all their sharpness
and tranquillity. By creating intermediate images, DMM enables perfect
studio quality, even with quick movements.
DNC: Abbreviation for “Digital Noise Control”. Weak TV signals (ana-
logue) can generate disruptive picture noise. DNC adjusts the effect
of digital noise reduction to the picture contents.
DNS: Abbreviation for Domain Name System. Readable names (e.g.
www.loewe-int.de) are assigned to numerical IP addresses. DNS
servers are responsible for the resolution of readable addresses into
the corresponding IP addresses.
Dolby Digital: Digital multi-channel sound. The digital standard for
high quality home movie systems. The individual channels are broad-
cast separately in this standard. The three front channels right, left
and centre, the two surround channels right and left and the external
subwoofer channels are called a 5.1 signal.
Dolby Pro Logic: Analogue multi-channel sound. Converts a Dolby-
coded stereo signal into a surround sound. This usually contains four
channels (front left, centre, front right, surround channel). A special
subwoofer channel is not generated in this method.
Dolby Pro Logic II: Analogue multi-channel sound. Dolby Pro Logic II
is a further development of Dolby Pro Logic. This method generates
a 6-channel spatial sound from a stereo or Pro-Logic signal (front left,
centre, front right, surround left, surround right, subwoofer).
Dolby Surround: An analogue surround sound system which uses a
matrix coding to fit four sound channels into two sound tracks.
Dolby Virtual Speaker: The Dolby Virtual Speaker technology
simulates the surround playback of a real 5.1 channel playback with
only two speakers.
DRM: Digital Rights Management. Processes to control copyright
protected data. To be used correctly, DRM protected contents require
not only a DRM capable device but also the possession of a license
issued by the provider (to be paid for).
DTS: Digital Theatre Systems; Digital multi-channel audio.
Art 40-60
User guide
140
Glossary
D (continued)
DVB-C/-S/-T: Digital Video Broadcasting stands for digital television.
Technical DVB is the standardised process for transmitting digital
content (television, radio, multi-channel audio, room sound, EPG,
Teletext, and other supplemental services) through digital technology.
CST for terrestrial or antenna distribution.
DVD: Abbreviation for Digital Video Disc and later Digital Versatile Disc.
DVD preceiver: Combi device of DVD player and radio without inte-
grated amplifier.
DVI: Digital Visual Interface, is an interface for transmitting digital
video and graphic data (without audio).
Dynamic contrast ratio: Here the light intensity of the display is
adapted in case of a high black content in the picture. The so-called
backlights are dimmed automatically and the contrast ratio increases
temporarily, i.e. dynamically.
E
Electronic Programme Guide: See EPG.
EPG: Electronic Programme Guide is the electronic variant of a printed
TV guide. Using the EPG you can watch the TV programme of the TV
station, transfer the appropriate data. The list of programmes contains
the title, beginning and end and duration of the programme. In addition
brief descriptions of the content of the programmes are also displayed.
Ethernet: Cable linked data net technology for local networks (LANs).
Also covers standards for e.g. plug connectors and transfer speeds.
Euro AV socket: Interface for connecting video devices to a TV set.
This socket is also referred to as Scart socket.
Exif: Standard format for additional data with modern digital cameras,
e.g. date and time, aperture, light sensitivity, alignment of the camera
(portrait/landscape).
F
FLOF: Full Level One Facilities. Teletext system in which names and
numbers of the jump destinations are transmitted in the bottom line
on every page. This guides the reader to related topics for example. An
information about which pages exist and which pages have sub-pages
is not available in FLOF.
G
Gateway: Transition to another network; in this case connection from
the home network to the Internet.
The network device that establishes this connection is normally used
as a standard gateway. As a rule, the DSL router also represents the
Internet gateway.
H
HbbTV: HbbTV (Hybrid broadcast broadband television) is an industry
standard that offers an open platform for technology that is not depend-
ent on manufacturers. HbbTV combines TV programmes with online
services seamlessly over broadband Internet (DSL).
HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection. Coding system
provided for the DVI and HDMI interfaces for secure transmission of
audio and video data.
HDMI: High Definition Multimedia Interface, represents a newly de-
veloped interface for the fully digital transfer of audio and video data.
HD Ready: A quality seal that is awarded to products that are capable
of displaying high-definition television (HDTV).
HDTV (HD): High Definition Television is a collective term, designating
a series of high-resolution television standards.
High and low band: Transmission ranges for satellites.
Host: Computer that the server services are provided from, i.e. that
makes data available. Refer also to media server.
I
ID3 tags: Additional information for MP3 and WMA audio files. Infor-
mation about the singer, title, album and album cover can be saved
here among other things. This data is then processed by the PC using
an ID3 tag editor.
IP address: IP addresses (Internet Protocol Addresses) are used to
identify devices in an Internet Protocol (IP) network. IP addresses are
made up of four groups of numbers of three digits each.
J
JPEG/JPG: Joint Photographic Experts Group is a committee, which
has developed a standardised method for the compression of digital
images. This method JPEG (JPG for short), named after the commit-
tee, is a commonly used graphic format for photos.
L
LAN: Abbreviation for Local Area Network. Mainly used as a name for
networks with cabling (Ethernet).
LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.
LCN: Logical Channel Numbers. In stations with LCN, the channel
location number belonging to the station is also transmitted by the
provider. The stations are sorted according to these channel location
numbers.
L-Link: Intelligent system connection between Loewe devices for the
automatic exchange of information. Makes the operation of TV and
Loewe system components even more convenient.
LNB/LNC: The crucial electronic component of a satellite antenna
is referred to as an LNB (Low Noise Block Converter). It is mounted
in the focal point of a parabolic antenna. The designation LNC (Low
Noise Converter) indicates that conversion to a lower intermediate
frequency takes place. The supplemental block in the LNB refers to the
fact that a whole frequency range (a block) is converted in each case.
M
MAC address: Hardware address of a network adaptor, e.g., he net-
work card in the PC. It is issued permanently by the manufacturer and
is used to uniquely identify devices in networks.
Mbit/sec: Information about the transfer rate in networks in megabits,
i.e. millions of characters per second. With WLAN the maximum speed
is 11 (IEEE 802.11b), 54 (IEEE 802.11g) or 300 (IEEE 802.11n) Mbit/
sec, in wired networks 10 Mbit/sec or 100 Mbit/sec (Fast Ethernet).
Media Server: Stands for the device on which multimedia content
is stored, but is also the name for the service provided by the device
that makes this data available to the network.
Modulator: Transmitter in the video or DVD recorder so that the
devices can receive signals via the tuner of the TV device.
Mono: Single channel sound.
MP3: Data format for compressed audio files.
MPEG: Digital compression method for video.
Multimedia content: Videos, music files and photos are grouped
together under this term.
Art 40-60
User guide
141
Glossary
N
NAS: The term describes a hard disk which is independently linked
to the network (i.e. without a PC).
Network ID: NID refers to the so-called programme ID number, also
known as network ID – a number between 0 and 8191. This specifica-
tion is necessary in specific cable networks of some countries. Then
only DVB signals of this station network are searched for.
NICAM: Audio standard. Is used in Denmark, England, France, Swe-
den, and Spain.
NTSC: American colour standard, stands for National Television
Standards Committee.
P
Page Catching: For teletext, refers to marking and calling a page
number.
PAL: European colour standard, stands for phase alternation line.
PCM: Pulse Code Modulation for digital sound.
Picture in Picture: See PIP.
PIP: Picture in Picture; a function which displays two pictures on the
screen.
Pixel: Also called picture element or pel. Denotes both the smallest
unit of a digital graphic grid and its display on a screen with grid control.
Pixel error: A pixel error is a defective pixel, usually on an LCD. Pixel
errors may be caused by production errors. They are expressed for
example by a constantly lit pixel or a constantly black pixel. Single
defective pixels however are excluded from a guarantee.
PNG: Abbreviation for Portable Network Graphics, a freely available
grid graphics format for loss-free compression.
Port: It allows assignment of data packages to various services which
are running on one device under the same network address.
Powerline: Powerline designates a type of wired network connection
in which data is transferred via the domestic electricity network using
optionally available adaptors.
Progressive JPEG: Progressive JPEGs are built up gradually. The
quality of the picture increases progressively during the loading
process.
ProScan/Progressive Scan: Progressive Scan (abbr. PS) or full
picture method is a technique in the picture build-up of monitors, TV
sets, beamers, and other display devices in which the output device is
not sent line interlaced half pictures – unlike in the interlace technique
– but real full pictures.
PSK: Clients that wish to connect to a wireless network secured with
PSK must know this key.
R
RGB: Colour signals Red, Green and Blue.
Router: Device for connecting several networks, e.g., home network
and Internet.
S
Satellite tuner: Receiver for satellite programmes.
SDTV: Standard Definition TeleVision.
SECAM: French colour standard, stands for Séquentiel à mémoire.
Set-top box: Set-top box (STB for short) refers to a device in enter-
tainment electronics which is connected to another device, usually a
TV set, and offers the user additional functional options.
Signal input group: Depending on the applied signal, the signal
sources are divided into different groups.
Signal strength: Strength of the received antenna signal.
Signal quality: Quality of the incoming antenna signal.
Smart Card: The Smart Card is an electronic chip card issued by the
respective programme provider or by the certification free Pay TV
operators. It contains the code which is decoded by the CA module.
Static contrast ratio: Describes the difference between the brightest
and darkest picture display.
Stereo: Dual channel sound.
Switch: Device for connecting several computers to a network.
Switching voltage: Video devices supply this voltage to switch the
TV set to playback.
Symbol rate: Specifies the transmission speed for data transmission.
T
Terrestrial: In data transmission a wireless transmission that does
not use satellites as intermediate station is referred to as terrestrial.
TFT: Thin Film Transistor. One widely distributed application is control
of liquid crystal flat screens, for which a signal transistor is used for
each pixel. This design of display is also referred to as active matrix,
however it is frequently also referred to as TFT display.
Tuner: Another term for receiver.
U
USB: Universal Serial Bus. Serial bus system for connecting external
devices (USB card reader, USB stick).
UPnP AV Is used to control network devices from all manufacturers.
Has become a widespread standard for home networking.
V
VGA: PC interface for connecting a monitor.
VPS: The Video Programming System (VPS) is a signal which some
(but not all) analogue TV stations transmit in the blanking interval.
The signal is used by video and DVD recorders when recording pro-
grammes to react to delays in start time, programme changes and
excesses of the planned programme time.
W
WEP: Abbreviation for Wired Equivalent Privacy. Former standard
process in the WiFi encryption, now outdated.
Wired network: see LAN.
Wireless network: see WLAN.
WLAN: Abbreviation for Wireless Local Area Network. Also abbrevi-
ated as wireless network.
WMA: Abbreviation for Windows Media Audio, Microsoft own audio
data format. As with MP3 files, the content is compressed here as well.
WMV: Abbreviation for Windows Media Video, proprietary Microsoft
video data format.
WPA: Abbreviation for Wi-Fi Protected Access. Replaced WEP as
standard encryption for wireless networks.
Art 40-60
User guide
142
Glossary
Y
Ycc/Ypp: Colour standards for Set-top boxes..
YCbCr: Digital colour model, informally also incorrect designation
for signals in standard resolution (SDTV). The YCbCr colour model,
in which, e.g., DVDs are coded, has been developed from the YUV
colour model used in analogue television technology. With YCbCr, the
data is transferred via digital interfaces such as DVI or HDMI without
being converted.
YPbPr: Analogue colour model, see also Component connection.
The analogue YPbPr signal is generated from the YCbCr signal by a
converter in the source player and then output at the 3 component
outputs of the source player.
YUV: The YUV colour model is used for analogue television in accord-
ance with the standards PAL and NTSC. YUV is often informally re-
ferred to when YPbPr (for analogue connections/cables) or YCbCr (in
digital applications) is actually meant. YUV only occurs in quadrature
modulation during PAL or NTSC transfer and is not otherwise used.
Art 40-60
User guide
143
EC Declaration of Conformity
ɌɨɡɢɭɪɟɞɨɬɝɨɜɚɪɹɧɚɨɫɧɨɜɧɢɬɟɢɡɢɫɤɜɚɧɢɹɢɪɚɡɲɢɪɟɧɢɬɟɫɴɨɬɜɟɬɧɢɩɪɟɞɩɨɫɬɚɜɤɢȾɢɪɟɤɬɢɜɚȿɋɊɚɡɪɟɲɟ-
ɧɨɟɢɡɩɨɥɡɜɚɧɟɬɨɦɭɜɴɜɜɫɢɱɤɢɞɴɪɠɚɜɢɨɬȿɋɢɨɫɜɟɧɬɨɜɚɜɂɫɥɚɧɞɢɹɇɨɪɜɟɝɢɹɢɒɜɟɣɰɚɪɢɹȼɴɜɎɪɚɧɰɢɹɢ
ɂɬɚɥɢɹɢɡɩɨɥɡɜɚɧɟɬɨɦɭɟɪɚɡɪɟɲɟɧɨɫɚɦɨɜɡɚɬɜɨɪɟɧɢɩɨɦɟɳɟɧɢɹ.
7RWR]DĜt]HQtMHYVRXODGXVH]iNODGQtPLSRåDGDYN\DRVWDWQtPLRGSRYtGDMtFtPLXVWDQRYHQtPL6PČUQLFH(*.0ĤåHEêW
SRXåtYDQYHYãHFK]HPtFK(8GRGDWHþQČWDNpQD,VODQGXY1RUVNX DYHâYêFDUVNX9H)UDQFLLDY,WDOLLMHSRXåLWtSĜtVWUR-
MHGRYROHQpMHQRPYLQWHULpUX.
Dieses Gerät entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprechenden Vorgaben der Richtlinie 1999/5/
EG. Es darf in allen Ländern der EU sowie zusätzlich in Island, Norwegen und der Schweiz betrieben werden. In Frankreich
und Italien ist die Nutzung nur in Innenräumen zulässig.
Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de væsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EF. Det må
kun anvendes i EU-landene samt i Island, Norge og Schweiz. I Frankrig og Italien er det kun tilladt at anvende det inden-
dørs.
Este equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales así como con otras disposiciones de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. Puede operar
en todos los países de la UE y adicionalmente en Islandia, Noruega y Suiza. En Francia e Italia, su uso está permitido
únicamente en espacios interiores.
Tämä laite täyttää direktiivin 1999/5/EY olennaiset vaatimukset ja on siinä asetettujen muiden laitetta koskevien määräysten
mukainen. Laitetta saa käyttää kaikissa EU-maissa sekä Islannissa, Norjassa ja Sveitsissä. Ranskassa ja Italiassa laitetta
saa käyttää vain sisätiloissa.
Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la Directive 1999/5/EC.
L‘utilisation est possible dans tous les pays de l‘UE, en Islande, en Norvège et en Suisse. En France et en Italie l‘utilisation
est autorisée uniquement dans des espaces fermés.
This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. It
may be operated in all countries in the EU and also in Iceland, Norway and Switzerland. In France and Italy it may only be
used indoors.
ǹȣIJȩȢȠİȟȠʌȜȚıȩȢİȓȞĮȚıİıȣȩȡijȦıȘİIJȚȢȠȣıȚȫįİȚȢĮʌĮȚIJȒıİȚȢțĮȚȐȜȜİȢıȤİIJȚțȑȢįȚĮIJȐȟİȚȢIJȘȢȅįȘȖȓĮȢ(&
ǼʌȚIJȡȑʌİIJĮȚȘȜİȚIJȠȣȡȖȓĮIJȘȢıİȩȜİȢIJȚȢȤȫȡİȢIJȘȢǼǼțĮșȫȢțĮȚıIJȘȞǿıȜĮȞįȓĮıIJȘȞȃȠȡȕȘȖȓĮțĮȚıIJȘȞǼȜȕİIJȓĮȈIJȘȞ
īĮȜȜȓĮțĮȚıIJȘȞǿIJĮȜȓĮİʌȚIJȡȑʌİIJĮȚȘȤȡȒıȘȝȩȞȠıİİıȦIJİȡȚțȠȪȢȤȫȡȠȣȢ.
Questo apparato é conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 1999/5/CE. Può essere messo
in funzione in tutti i paesi dell‘UE e inoltre in Islanda, Norvegia e in Svizzera. In Francia e in Italia è consentito l‘uso solo in
ambienti chiusi.
Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-direktiv 1999/5/EF. Det kan
brukes i alle EU-land og dessuten i Island, Norge og Sveits. I Frankrike og Italia er kun innendørs bruk tillatt.
Dit apparaat voldoet aan de essentiele eisen en andere van toepassing zijnde bepalingen van de Richtlijn 1999/5/EG. Het
gebruik is toegestaan in alle landen van de EU en ook in IJsland, Noorwegen en Zweden. In Frankrijk en Italië is het gebruik
slechts binnenshuis toegestaan.
Este aparelho está em conformidade com os requisitos fundamentais e todas as restantes disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/
CE. Pode ser utilizado em todos os países da UE assim como na Islândia, Noruega e Suíça. Em França e Itália a sua utili-
zação apenas é permitida em espaços interiores.
Denna utrustning är i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestämmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EC.
Apparaten får användas i alla länder inom EU liksom på Island, i Norge och i Schweiz. I Frankrike och Italien får apparaten
användas endast inomhus.
Art 40-60
User guide
144
EC Declaration of Conformity
Art 40-60
User guide
145
Index
Symbole
3D ..................................................................................................... 80
3D function ...................................................................................... 82
A
Access code .................................................................................... 94
Accurate Recording .........................................................................74
Adding stations to personal list ...................................................... 90
Adjusting the sound ........................................................................ 84
Allow switching voltage .................................................................. 115
Antenna DVB ...........................................................................113, 115
Antenna DVB-S .............................................................................. 115
Antenna DVB-T ............................................................................... 115
Archive recording ............................................................................ 45
Audio commentary ........................................................................102
Audio commentary volume ........................................................... 84
AUDIO key ......................................................................................124
Audio playback
Playback ........................................................................................ 61
Audio playback from external devices ..........................................123
Audio return channel .....................................................................122
Auto dimming - Room ..............................................................80, 82
Auto dimming - Video (VBD+) ....................................................... 82
Automatic scan TV+Radio ............................................................. 85
Automatic shutdown .........................................................................7
Auto speech detection ................................................................... 84
AV connecting setting .................................................................... 115
AV list ................................................................................................37
AV output signal .............................................................................. 84
B
Balance ............................................................................................ 84
Batteries ...........................................................................................14
Blu-ray player ..................................................................................117
Bookmarks
Delete ........................................................................................... 59
Delete individual ones ................................................................. 59
Jump ............................................................................................ 58
Set .......................................................................................... 45, 57
Brightness ....................................................................................... 80
Browser ............................................................................................ 70
Bundling the cables .........................................................................14
C
Calling the Web browser ................................................................. 70
Camcorder ............................................................................. 117, 120
CA modul ................................................................................. 76, 106
Changing the title of an archive ..................................................... 48
Character table ................................................................................18
CI slot ................................................................................................76
Cleaning and care ..............................................................................7
Clear data base ............................................................................... 93
Code number .................................................................................. 94
Coloured keys ................................................................................... 41
Colour intensity ............................................................................... 80
Colour temperature ........................................................................ 80
Component connection ................................................................ 121
Connecting antennas ......................................................................12
Connecting HiFi/AV amplifier ........................................................122
Connecting home network ..............................................................13
Connecting the Audio system .......................................................122
Connecting the TV set ..................................................................... 12
Connections ............................................................................... 11, 79
Contrast ........................................................................................... 80
Control ..............................................................................................79
Copying/Moving your recordings .................................................. 49
Create new personal list ................................................................. 90
D
Data capture .................................................................................... 93
Deblocking filter .............................................................................. 80
Delete
Bookmarks .................................................................................. 59
individual bookmarks .................................................................. 59
Recording ..................................................................................... 48
Delete manager ............................................................................... 49
Set delete protection for timer recording ...................................74
Setting/cancelling delete protection .......................................... 49
Delete personal list ......................................................................... 90
Deleting blocks ................................................................................ 89
Deleting stations from the personal list ........................................ 90
Digital Link ...................................................................................... 116
Digital Link HD functionality .......................................................... 116
Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC) .......................................................... 118
Digital Noise Control (DNC) ........................................................... 80
Direct recording .............................................................................. 45
One Touch Recording ................................................................. 45
Display .............................................................................................. 15
DR+ archive ......................................................................................47
DR+ Streaming ................................................................................ 50
Notify started „Follow me“ recording .......................................103
Playback via the network ............................................................ 50
DR+ Streaming settings ................................................................103
DR+ device group name ............................................................103
DR+ device name .......................................................................103
IP port number ...........................................................................103
Use Archive other TVs ...............................................................103
DVB character set ..........................................................................102
DVB settings ...................................................................................102
DVD player .......................................................................................117
DVI ....................................................................................................117
E
Edit new personal list ...................................................................... 90
Edit personal list .............................................................................. 90
Energy efficiency .................................................................20, 71, 95
Environment ...................................................................................138
EPG .................................................................................................. 38
Exit Browser .................................................................................... 70
Extras ................................................................................................ 71
F
Favourites ........................................................................................ 33
Film quality improvement (DMM) ................................................. 80
FLOF .................................................................................................. 41
Follow me function .......................................................................... 50
Function list ......................................................................................37
G
Game console ......................................................................... 116, 117
Gaming mode ................................................................................. 116
H
Hard disks .......................................................................................107
Formatting ..................................................................................107
HbbTV .............................................................................................. 43
HbbTV text ...................................................................................... 43
HDMI ................................................................................................117
HDMI ARC .......................................................................................122
HDMI CEC ....................................................................................... 118
Headphone volume .........................................................................37
Home networking systems ...........................................................123
Home view ....................................................................................... 32
Art 40-60
User guide
146
Index
I
Image+ Active ................................................................................. 80
Info display ........................................................................................19
Installing the TV set ......................................................................... 12
Integrated features ...........................................................................78
Internal WLAN antenna ................................................................... 51
Interval functions .............................................................................57
Deleting part of the recording .................................................... 58
Hide .............................................................................................. 58
J
Jump ................................................................................................ 54
Jump distance ................................................................................103
Jumping to Bookmarks .................................................................. 58
L
Language ...........................................................................20, 93, 129
Length of the station list ................................................................. 34
LNC/LNB .............................................................................25, 27, 28
Loewe Apps ....................................................................................126
Loudness ......................................................................................... 84
M
Mains switch ............................................................................... 10, 15
Manual scan Radio .......................................................................... 85
Manual scan TV ............................................................................... 85
Maximum volume ........................................................................... 84
Media
Access ........................................................................................... 51
Exit .................................................................................................51
Overview ....................................................................................... 51
MediaNet
Browse ......................................................................................... 69
Call ................................................................................................ 68
Exit ................................................................................................ 68
Settings ........................................................................................ 69
Mobile phone keyboard ................................................................... 18
Move block ...................................................................................... 89
Move picture up/down .................................................................... 80
Move stations in the personal list ..................................................90
Multimedia / Network .....................................................................79
Multimedia settings ....................................................................... 112
Music playback
end ............................................................................................... 63
Radio mode ................................................................................. 64
Repeat .......................................................................................... 62
Shuffle playback .......................................................................... 62
Winding .........................................................................................61
N
Network connections
Wired ............................................................................................. 51
Wireless ......................................................................................... 51
Network selection ..................................................................... 22, 23
Network settings ............................................................................109
Neue Persönliche Liste anlegen ..................................................... 90
Notify hidden sections ...................................................................103
Numerical keys ...........................................................................16, 34
O
One Touch Recording ..................................................................... 45
On/Off button ............................................................................. 10, 15
On-screen displays ........................................................................ 101
OPC .................................................................................................. 80
P
Page selection .................................................................................. 41
Parental lock ..............................................................................50, 94
PC IN ............................................................................................... 121
PC IN - Display ................................................................................. 80
Personal list ..................................................................................... 35
Add station .................................................................................. 90
Create new list ............................................................................. 90
Delete list .....................................................................................90
Delete station .............................................................................. 90
Move station ................................................................................ 90
Rename list .................................................................................. 90
Photo ................................................................................................ 66
Exit .................................................................................................67
Full-screen mode ..........................................................................67
Rotating the photo .......................................................................67
Slide show .....................................................................................67
Picture ...................................................................................... 79, 104
Picture adjustment ................................................................... 80, 81
Picture format ........................................................................... 80, 81
4:3 .................................................................................................81
16:9 ................................................................................................81
PALplus .........................................................................................81
Panorama ..................................................................................... 81
Zoom .............................................................................................81
Picture settings ............................................................................... 80
Positioning/aligning the DVB-T antenna ...................................... 115
Q
Quick start mode ............................................................................ 95
R
Record conflict .................................................................................73
Recording .......................................................................................107
Post record time .........................................................................107
Pre-record time ..........................................................................107
Remote control ....................................................................9, 14, 124
Remote TV switch on of the TV set .............................................. 116
Renaming the personal list ............................................................. 90
Renderer ......................................................................................... 112
Repeat initial installation ...........................................................20, 78
Reset to factory settings .................................................................78
Network ........................................................................................78
Picture/Sound ..............................................................................78
Speaker system ............................................................................78
Restore stations .............................................................................. 89
RS-232C interface ..........................................................................123
S
Safety ............................................................................................. 6, 7
Satellite selection ......................................................... 25, 26, 27, 28
Satellite system ................................................................................24
Scope of delivery ................................................................................5
Scrambled stations ................................................22, 23, 29, 76, 86
Selecting a station out of the station list ....................................... 34
Select station .................................................................................. 34
using the numerical keys ............................................................ 34
via personal list ............................................................................ 35
with P+/P- ................................................................................... 34
Serial recording tolerance .............................................................103
Service ............................................................................................148
Set covers ......................................................................................... 12
Setting the HiFi/AV amplifier ......................................................... 114
Setting the volume .......................................................................... 34
Set-top box ......................................................................................117
Sharpness .......................................................................................80
Art 40-60
User guide
147
Index
Shutdown of the ext. device via TV button ................................... 116
Side by side ..................................................................................... 82
Signal type ...................................................................................... 115
Skin tone .......................................................................................... 80
Slow motion .................................................................................... 56
Smart Card .......................................................................................76
Smart jump ............................................................................. 54, 103
Software download ......................................................................... 96
Software update
Automatic update via the internet ........................................... 100
Manually via Antenna .................................................................. 98
Software update via Antenna ..................................................... 99
Via USB memory medium ..........................................................97
Sound .........................................................................................79, 84
Sound adjustment .......................................................................... 84
Sound components ....................................................................... 114
Special functions .............................................................................78
Standby mode ..................................................................................15
Station lists Radio .....................................................................85, 89
Station lists TV ..........................................................................85, 89
Stations ......................................................................................79, 85
Status display .................................................................................. 36
STB key ...........................................................................................124
Stop recording early ....................................................................... 46
Subtitle ......................................................................45, 59, 102, 103
Supply voltage 5V .......................................................................... 115
Switching off the TV set during recording ..................................... 46
Switch off ..........................................................................................15
Switch on .......................................................................................... 15
Switch-on volume ........................................................................... 84
System settings ...............................................................................79
T
Teletext ............................................................................................. 41
Time and date ................................................................................ 101
Timer ................................................................................................. 71
Timer list ....................................................................................... 71
Timer Services .............................................................................75
Timer data ........................................................................................74
Automatic time control ................................................................74
Beginning ......................................................................................74
Date ...............................................................................................74
Delete protection ..........................................................................74
End ................................................................................................74
Favourite .......................................................................................74
Lock recording ..............................................................................74
Recording subtitles ......................................................................74
Recording type .............................................................................74
Station ...........................................................................................74
TOP ...................................................................................................41
Top/bottom ..................................................................................... 82
TV key ....................................................................................... 14, 124
TV on when memorised ................................................................. 93
TV viewing with time shift .............................................................. 45
U
UPnP .................................................................................................51
USB stick ......................................................................................... 96
V
VBD+ ................................................................................................ 80
VIDEO key .......................................................................................124
Video playback
Change picture format ................................................................ 56
Jump by entering a time ............................................................. 54
Playback ....................................................................................... 53
Repeat .......................................................................................... 55
Selecting language/sound .......................................................... 56
Winding ........................................................................................ 55
Viewing a locked movie .................................................................. 50
Viewing another movie from the archive during archive recording
.45
W
Web .................................................................................................. 68
WEB key function ...........................................................................108
Y
YPbPr .............................................................................................. 121
YUV ................................................................................................. 121
Art 40-60
User guide
148
Service
HB Austria electronic products Ver-
triebs GmbH
Pfarrgasse 52
1230 Wien, Österreich
Tel +43 - 1 610 48 - 100
E-mail: support@hb-europe.com
Qualifi Pty Ltd
24 Lionel Road
Mt.Waverley VIC 3149 Australia
Tel +61-03-8542 1111
Fax +61-03-9543 3677
E-mail: info@qualifi.com.au
Loewe Opta Benelux NV/SA
Uilenbaan 84
2160 Wommelgem, België
Tel +32 - 3 - 2 70 99 30
Fax +32 - 3 - 2 71 01 08
E-mail: ccc@loewe.be
Darlington Service
193 Kn. Klementina St.
1612 Sofia, Bulgaria
Tel +359 - 2 9556399
E-mail: darlington@psp-bg.com
Telion AG
Rütistrasse 26
8952 Schlieren, Schweiz
Tel +41 - 44 732 15 11
Fax +41 - 44 732 15 02
E-mail: infoKD@telion.ch
Guangdong MG Audio Development Co.Ltd
No.8 Jinghu Rd. Xinhua St. Huadu Reg.
GZ, PRC
Tel +86-(0)20-22675666
Fax +86-(0)20-22675777
E-mail: service@loewe-mg.com
Xiamen Tenote Investment Co. Ltd
26F 3# Xinglin Bay Operation Center,
No.478 xinglinwan Avenue,
Jimei District, Xiamen, Fujian, PRC
Tel +86-400 088 1566
E-mail: service@loewe-tnt.com
Hadjikyriakos & Sons Ltd.
121 Prodromos Str., P.O Box 21587
1511 Nicosia, Cyprus
Tel +357 - 22 87 21 11
Fax +357 - 22 66 33 91
E-mail: savvas@hadjikyriakos.com.cy
BaSys CS s.r.o.
Sodomkova 1478/8
10200 Praha 10 - Hostivar,
Česká republika
Tel +420 234 706 700
Fax +420 234 706 701
E-mail: office@basys.cz
Loewe Technologies GmbH,
Customer Care Center
Industriestraße 11
96317 Kronach, Deutschland
Tel +49 9261 99-500
Fax +49 9261 99-515
E-mail: ccc@loewe.de
EET Europarts
Loewe Denmark
Bregnerødvej 133 D
3460 Birkerød, Denmark
Tel +45 - 82 19 19
E-mail: info@eeteuroparts.dk
Gaplasa S.A.
Conde de Torroja, 25
28022 Madrid, España
Tel +34 - 917 48 29 60
Fax +34 - 913 29 16 75
E-mail: loewe@maygap.com
Loewe France SAS
Rue du Dépôt,
13 Parc de l l‘Europe, BP 10010
67014 Strasbourg Cédex, France
Tel +33 - 3- 88 79 72 50
Fax +33 - 3- 88 79 72 59
E-mail: loewe.france@loewe-fr.com
EET Europarts
Loewe Finland
Metsänneidonkuja 12
02130 Espoo, Finland
Tel +358 9 47 850 900
www.eeteuroparts.fi
Loewe UK Limited
1st Floor, 237A Kensington High St
London
W8 6SA, UK
Tel +44 - (0) 207 368 1100
Fax +44 - (0) 207 368 1101
E-mail: enquiries@loewe-uk.com
Issagogiki Emboriki Ellados S.A.
321 Mesogion Av.
152 31 Chalandri-Athens, Hellas
Tel +30 - 210 672 12 00
Fax +30 - 210 674 02 04
E-mail: christina_argyropoulou@
isembel.gr
Basys Magyarországi KFT
Tó park u.9.
2045 Törökbálint, Magyar
Tel +36 - 23 887-920
Fax +36 - 23 41 51 82
E-mail: ertekesites@basys.hu
Plug&Play Ltd.
Bednjanska 8, 10000 Zagreb
Hrvatska (Kroatia)
Tel +385 1 4929 683
Fax +385 1 4929 682
E-mail: info@loewe.hr
Loewe Italiana S.r.L.
Via Monte Baldo, 14/P – 14/N
37069 Dossobuono di Villafranca di
Verona
Tel +39 - 045 82 51 690
Fax +39 - 045 82 51 622
E-mail: info@loewe.it
Clear electronic entertainment Ltd
13 Noah Mozes St.
Agish Ravad Building
Tel Aviv 67442, Israel
Tel +972 - 3 - 6091100
Fax +972 - 3 - 6092200
E-mail: info@loewe.co.il
MIHAUS.
Plot No.390, M.G.Road
Near Ghitorni Metro Station
Opp.Metro Pillar No.112
Ghitorni, New Delhi-110030, India
Tel. +91 11 64008851
Tel. +91 11 64008854
Fax +91 11 47675615
E-Mail: corporate@mihaus.in
Pars Royal Taramesh
LOEWE Gallery
#3 Shariati St. Opp. Soheil St.
P.O Box 1914965537
Tehran, Iran
Tel + 98 21-22391661
E-Mail: info@tarameshgroup.com
JOR
ACCU-TECH Solutions Co.
1-Kharija Al-Ashja‘i Street
Jabal Al-Weibdeh
P.O.Box 9668 Amman 11191, Jordan
Tel: +962-6-465-9985
Fax: +962-6-465-0119
E-Mail: info@accutech-solutions.net
LOEWE Show Room
Olaya Street, Near Kingdom Center
RIYADH, SAUDI ARABIA
P.O Box 92831 Riyadh 11663
Tel +966-11-4640927
Fax +966-11-4640759
E-mail: hkkurkjian@gmail.com
Kpartners, SIA
A.Čaka iela 80
Rīga, LV-1011, Latvia
Tel +3 71 - 67 29 29 59
Fax +3 71 - 67 31 05 68
E-mail: evgenii.bebnev@loewe.lv
A Cappella Ltd.
Ausros Vartu 5, Pasazo skg.
01129 Vilnius, Lithuania
Tel +370 - 52 12 22 96
Fax +370 - 52 62 66 81
E-mail: info@loewe.lt
Doneo Co. Ltd
34/36 Danny Cremona Street
Hamrun, HMR1514, Malta
Tel +356 - 21 - 22 53 81
Fax +356 - 21 - 23 07 35
E-mail: service@doneo.com.mt
Premium Consumer Electronics as
Østre Kullerød 5
3241 Sandefjord, Norge
Tel +47 - 33 29 30 40
Fax +47 - 33 44 60 44
E-mail: loewe@loewe.no
Gaplasa S.A.
Rua Professor Henrique de Barros
Edifício Sagres, 2º. C
2685-338 Prior Velho, Portugal
Tel +351 - 21 942 78 30
Fax +351 - 21 940 00 78
E-mail: geral.loewe@mayro.pt
3LOGIC Sp.z o.o.
ul. Zakopiańska 153
30-435 Kraków
Tel +48 - 12 640 20 00
Fax +48 - 12 640 20 01
www.3logic.pl
V2 Indonesia
5th Intiland tower
Jl. Jenderal Sudirman 32
Jakarta 10220, INDONESIA
Tel +62-21 57853547
E-mail: service@v2indonesia.com
I Control SAL
Gemmaizeh, Rmeil.
Building 328 1st Floor Beirut, Lebanon
Tel +961 1 446777 / 1 587446
Fax +961 1 582446
E-mail: info@icontrol-leb.com
Service Center Loewe
Aptekarsky per.4 podjezd 5A
105005 Moscow, Russia
Tel +7 - 499 940 42 32 ( ext. 454 )
Fax +7 - 495 730 78 01
E-mail: service@loewe-cis.ru
EET Europarts AB
Loewe Sweden
Box 4124
SE-131 04, Nacka, Sverige
Tel +46 - 8 507 510 00
E-mail: Kundservice@eeteuroparts.se
Atlas Care Centre
11 changi south street 3
#03-01 builders centre
Singapore 486122
Tel +65 - 6745 2028
Fax +65 - 6546 7861
E-mail: service@atlas-sv.com
BaSys SK, s.r.o.
Stará Vajnorská 37/C
83104 Bratislava, Slovakia
Tel + 421 2 49 10 66 11
Fax + 421 2 49 10 66 33
E-mail: loewe@basys.sk
ENKAY GROUP
SERVISPLUS MUSTERI HIZMETLERI
Alemdag Cad. Site Yolu No:18
Umraniye, Istanbul, TÜRKIYE
Tel 444 4 784
E-mail: info@servisplus.com.tr
Dubai Audio Center
P.O. Box 32836, Sheikh Zayed Road
Dubai, UAE
Tel +971 - 4 343 14 41
Fax +971 - 4 343 77 48
E-mail: service@dubaiaudio.com
© by Loewe Technologies 22.04.14
Art 40-60
User guide
149
STB
ABSAT 166, 169
AEGIR 179
AIWA 141
AKAI 033, 104
ALBA 060, 017, 067, 104,
111, 126, 180, 201
ALCATEL 336
ALDES 133, 168, 179, 201
ALLSAT 033, 048, 059, 077, 201
ALLSONIC 133, 168, 226
ALLTECH 060, 137, 225
ALPHA 033
ALTAI 047
AMITRONICA 060
AMPERE 047, 186, 207
AMSTRAD 060, 006, 047, 071, 097,
132, 165, 174, 175, 186,
212, 216, 217, 227, 228
ANGLO 060
ANKARO 060, 051, 133,
161, 162, 168, 226
ANTTRON 017, 077, 180
APOLLO 017
ARCON 025, 051, 079, 132, 136, 161
ARMSTRONG 033, 175
ARTHUR MARTIN 130
ASA 009
ASAT 025, 033
ASLF 060
AST 127, 194
ASTACOM 171, 172
ASTON 032, 095
ASTRA 013, 021, 025, 098, 099
164, 175, 178, 190, 222, 223
ASTRO 006, 091, 094, 176,
177, 179, 180, 181
AUDIOTON 059, 180
AUSTAR 212, 332
AVALON 047
AXIS 054, 210, 223, 226
BARCOM 021, 051
BEKO 067
BEST 051, 226
BIRMINGHAM CABLE 343
BLAUPUNKT 090, 176
BLUE SKY 060, 217
BOCA 163, 169, 175, 186,
199, 207, 222
BRAIN WAVE 094, 161
BRANDT 069
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 050, 227
BRITISH TELECOM 341
BROADCAST 013
BROCO 060, 223
BRUNS 133
BSKYB 227
BT 104, 171, 172, 229, 335
BT SATELLITE 171
BUBU SAT 060
BUSH 048, 077, 106, 126
BVV 161
CABLETIME 308, 311, 312, 333, 334
CAMBRIDGE 006, 104, 199
CANAL 019
CANAL DIGITAL 128
CANAL PLUS 128, 019, 320, 321
CANAL SATELLITE 128, 191, 211
CANARY 137
CARAT.SOM 054
CHAPARRAL 012, 134
CHESS 197
CITYCOM 135, 164, 203, 204, 230
CLARK 180
CLATRONIC 094
CLEMENS KAMPHUS 133, 210
CLYDE CABLE VISION 317
CNT 179
COMCAST 004
COMCRYPT 320, 321
COMMANDER 161, 162
COMMLINK 168
COMMUNICADO 054
COMTEC 054, 168
CONDOR 164, 226
CONNEXIONS 047, 096, 226, 231
CONRAD 006, 010, 164, 169, 226, 230
CONTEC 054, 135, 169
COSAT 059
CROWN 175
CRYPTOVISION 067, 315
CYBERMAXX 116
CYRUS 037
DAERYUNG 047
DAEWOO 060, 017, 025
DANSAT 048, 077
DAUMLING 163
D-BOX 045, 214
DECCA 038
DECSAT 310
DECSAT CANAL 310
DELFA 212
DEUTSCHE TELEKOM 056
DEW 025, 054
DIAMOND 225
DIRECTV 144
DISCOVERER 197
DISEQC 171, 172
DISK EXPRESS 051
DISMOND 225
DISTRATEL 119, 146, 147, 149, 185, 217
DISTRISAT 033, 059
DNR 161
DNT 033, 037, 047, 231
DRAKE 029
DST 017
DUAL 025
DUNE 226
DYNASAT 196
ECHOSTAR 060, 021, 047, 086,
088, 128, 211, 213
EIF 014, 198
EINHELL 060, 006, 017, 097, 163,
168, 169, 175, 186, 222
ELEKTA 179
ELSAT 071
ELTA 017, 033, 059, 226
ELTASAT 059
EMANON 017
EMME ESSE 133, 213, 226
ENGEL 060
EP SAT 067
EURIEULT 185, 217
EUROCRYPT 021, 067
EURODEC 110, 232
EUROPA 006, 033, 161,
162, 164, 169, 212
EUROPEAN 163
EUROSAT 175, 225
EUROSKY 164, 175, 186, 226
EUROSTAR 164, 215, 233, 234
EUTRA 137, 203
EXATOR 017, 104, 180
FAGOR 059
FERGUSON 023, 048, 067, 077,
106, 108, 111, 124, 206
FIDELITY 006, 071, 097
FILMNET 318
FINLANDIA 021, 067
FINLUX 009, 010, 021, 067, 220
FINNSAT 110
FLAIR MATE 060
FORCE 068
FOXTEL 235, 022, 319
FRACARRO 017, 087, 196, 213
FRANCE TELECOM 344
FREECOM 017, 193, 201
FREESAT 137
FTE 060, 080, 136, 137, 169,
196, 199, 212, 226
FUBA 010, 014, 017, 021, 047,
051, 088, 135, 176, 220, 226
G SAT 077, 130
GALAXI 051
GALAXIS 054, 059, 133, 161, 168,
209, 210, 211, 212, 223,
226, 236, 237, 238
GALAXISAT 127
GARDINER 204
GEC 317
GENIX 024
GENERAL-INSTRUMENTS 332
GIUCAR RECORD 089
GMI 175
GOLDBOX 128, 191, 211
GOODMANS 067, 111
GRAETZ 088, 099
GRANADA 021, 099
GRANDIN 185, 239
GROTHUSEN 017, 193
GRUNDIG 026, 003, 067, 090, 097,
171, 172, 176, 217, 227,
240, 241, 242, 020, 307, 316
HANSEATIC 197
HANTOR 017, 094
HANURI 179
HARTING UND HELLING 133
HASE & IGEL 161
HELIOCOM 164
HIGH PERFORMANCE 085, 122
HINARI 017, 077
HIRSCHMANCE 090
HIRSCHMANN 006, 009, 010, 047, 081,
113, 133, 171, 172, 176,
196, 203, 216, 219, 243
HISAWA 094
HITACHI 067, 106, 111, 120
HNE 165
HOUSTON 059, 071, 161, 162, 171
HUMAX 212, 236, 244, 005
HUTH 013, 054, 059, 094, 133,
136, 161, 162, 163, 164,
168, 169, 175, 186
HYPERVISION 345
ICX 138
IKUSI ALLSAT 136
IMEX 185
IMPERIAL 126
INGELEN 088, 099
INNOVATION 116
INTERNATIONAL 186
INTERTRONIC 175
INTERVISION 042, 059, 164, 170
INVIDEO 213
ITALTEL 213
ITT 021, 067, 088, 099, 120, 123
ITT NOKIA 009, 010, 021, 067, 088,
099, 120, 123, 214
JEEMON 059
JERROLD 138, 330, 332, 341, 343
JOHANSSON 059, 094
JOK 171, 172, 200, 229
JSR 059
JVC 003, 104
KABELVISION 330
KAMM 060, 215
KATHREIN 060, 033, 037, 080, 081,
090, 091, 094, 096, 112,
114, 135, 166, 176, 180,
196, 204, 218, 245, 246
KEY WEST 163
KOLON 017
KONIG 164
KOSCOM 210
KOSMOS 080, 081, 133, 193
KR 059, 137, 180, 203
KREISELMEYER 176
K-SAT 060
KYOSTAR 017, 180
KYOTO GMI ATLAN 143
L&S ELECTRONIC 226
LASAT 054, 164, 175, 179,
186, 199, 222, 226
LEMON 161, 162, 247
LENCO 060, 017, 025, 079, 161,
162, 164, 193, 221, 223, 226
LENNOX 042, 059
LENSON 006
LEXUS 033
LEYCO 104
LG (GOLDSTAR) 079, 107, 193
LIFESAT 197, 226
LIFETEX 116
LOKIA 088
LORENZEN 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 186
LORRAINE 193
LUPUS 226
LUXOR 006, 010, 021, 088, 097,
099, 120, 123, 130, 214
LYONNAISE 110
M&B1 197
MACAB 225, 232, 248, 329
MAGAI 080
MANATA 060, 171, 172
MANHATTAN 042, 059, 067, 106,
111, 151, 171, 172,
179, 210, 221
MARANTZ 033, 037
MASCOM 081
MASPRO 060, 026, 003, 093, 096,
106, 108, 113, 137, 161,
176, 242
MASTER_S 135
MATSUI 003, 109, 171, 172, 176
MAX 164
MB 197
MEDIABOX 191, 211
MEDIAMARKT 175
MEDIASAT 006, 128, 191, 211, 223
MEDION 060, 226
MEDISON 060
MEGA 033
MELECTRONIC 204
MEMPHIS 054, 134
METRONIC 060, 017, 117, 119, 121,
131, 146, 147, 149, 151,
152, 153, 154, 156, 157,
168, 175, 179, 180, 185,
204, 217
METZ 090, 176
MICRO 164, 180
MICRO ELECTRONIC 060
MICRO MAXX 116
MICRO STAR 116
MICRO TEC 060
MICRO TECHNOLOGY 060, 190, 223
MICRONIK 249
MINERVA 003, 090
MITSUBISHI 067, 090
MITSUMI 222
MNET 320, 321, 342
MORGAN 060, 033, 059, 132, 163,
169, 175, 186, 199, 207,
222, 250
MOVIE TIME 328
MR ZAPP 329
MULTICHOICE 100, 235
MULTISTAR 080
MURATTO 127, 193
MYRYAD 037
MYSAT 060
NAVEX 094
NEC 030, 073
NEIRU 079
NETA P 140
NETWORK 077
NEUHAUS 060, 006, 059, 161,
162, 164, 169, 210, 223,
NEUSAT 060, 161, 210
NEXTWAVE 138
NIKKO 060, 175, 201
NOKIA 009, 010, 021, 045, 067,
088, 099, 105, 120, 123,
211, 214, 242, 251, 346
NOMEX 221
NOOS 329
NORCO 221
NORDMENDE 017, 067, 179, 206
NOVIS 094
NSC 328
NTC 133, 203
NTL CABLETELL 332
OCEANIC 225
OCTAGON 017, 025, 054, 161, 162, 180
OKANO 080, 133, 175
OLYMPIC 133
ONDIGITAL 187, 188, 189
ONO 301
OPTEX 059, 135, 196, 208
Code page
Art 40-60
User guide
150
OPTIMA 133
OPTUS 332
ORBIT 025, 194
ORBITECH 006, 017, 103, 169, 181, 224
ORIGO 126, 221
OSAT 097
OTTO VERSAND 090
OXFORD 104
PACE 001, 022, 044, 048, 050,
067, 077, 098, 108, 124,
189, 202, 227, 242, 252,
253, 319, 347
PACIFIC 225
PACKSAT 171, 172
PALCOM 092
PALLADIUM 003, 006, 017, 175
PALSAT 006
PANASAT 235, 254
PANASONIC 031, 067, 124, 227
PANDA 021, 048, 067, 164, 176, 210
PATRIOT 104
PHILIPS 026, 003, 033, 037, 051,
067, 077, 124, 128, 144,
156, 161, 162, 169, 171,
172, 176, 180, 187, 188,
191, 204, 211, 218, 229,
242, 313, 323, 329, 345
PHOENIX 054, 077
PHONOTREND 042, 059, 133,
142, 168, 212
PIONEER 128, 191, 211, 302
PIXX 255
PLANET 126, 213
POLSAT 110
POLYTRON 047, 135
PREDKI 017, 094
PREISNER 047, 103, 163, 169,
175, 186, 199, 222
PREMIER 059, 133
PREMIERE 191, 211, 214, 007
PROMAX 067
PROSAT 168, 170
PROSONIC 165
PROTEK 225
PROVISAT 201
PROVISION 179
PVP STEREO VISUAL 330
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 341
PYE 003
PYXIS 208, 210
QUADRAL 168, 169, 170,
171, 172, 173, 226
QUELLE 090, 097, 164, 165
QUIERO 110
RADIOLA 033, 037
RADIX 047, 137, 216
RAINBOW 137, 180
RC 138
RC-1000 104
RED STAR 226
REDPOINT 223
REDSTAR 226
RFT 033, 037, 161, 162, 168, 224
ROADSTAR 060
ROVER 060, 170
SABA 077, 108, 161, 164,
171, 172, 179, 200,
201, 206, 217, 229
SABRE 067
SAGEM 205, 329
SAKURA 054, 057
SALORA 021, 088, 099, 120, 130, 303
SAMSUNG 017, 080, 127, 132,
211, 243, 302, 324
SAT 006, 071, 127, 194
SAT PARTNER 017, 094, 133,
179, 180, 193, 201
SAT TEAM 060
SATBOX 304
SATCOM 013, 164, 197
SATEC 060, 077, 242
SATECO 017
SATELCO 226
SATFORD 013
SATLINE 170
SATMASTER 013
SATPARTNER 017, 079, 094, 133, 179,
180, 193, 201
SATSTATION 151
SAVA 077, 108, 161, 164, 171,
172, 179, 200, 201, 206, 217
SCHACKE 180
SCHAUB LORENZ 088, 099
SCHNEIDER 171, 172, 218
SCHWAIGER 077, 114, 135, 161, 164,
169, 197, 217, 255
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 305, 306, 325, 326
SEDEA-ELECTRONIQUE 017
SEEMANN 047, 104, 175, 223
SEG 017, 094, 165,
178, 190, 197, 226
SELECO 059, 213
SEPTIMO 146, 151, 154
SERVI SAT 059
SIEMENS 090, 176, 199
SILVA 079, 193
SINTRACK 013
SKANTIN 060
SKARDIN 223
SKINSAT 006
SKR 060
SKY 034, 050, 189, 227, 001
SKY MASTER 060, 133, 168,
170, 197, 215
SKY PLUS 002
SKYLAB 051
SKYMAX 033
SKYSAT 197
SKYVISION 059
SL 161, 165, 175, 186
SM ELECTRONIC 060
SMART 186
SONY 067, 211, 227
SR 222
STARLAND 060
STARRING 094
STARSAT 080
STRONG 017, 025, 179, 180, 186,
196, 211, 226, 235
STS 328
STV 014
STVI 014, 137
SUMIDA 175
SUNNY SOUND 226
SUNSAT 060, 223
SUNSTAR 163, 175, 186, 222, 226
SUPERCABLE 343
SUPERNOVA 189
TAGRA 059
TANDBERG 008
TANDY 085, 122
TANTEC 067, 108
TATUNG 067
TCM 116
TECHNILAND 013, 059
TECHNISAT 006, 028, 033, 047, 102
103, 181, 184, 224, 231
TECHNOWELT 164
TECO 025, 175, 222
TELASAT 164, 197
TELECIEL 180, 201
TELECOM 060
TELEDIREKT 077
TELEFUNKEN 017, 083, 171 , 172
TELEKA 026, 006, 047, 081, 103,
180, 161, 164, 175, 203, 210
TELEMASTER 179
TELEMAX 018
TELEPIU 320, 321
TELE PLUS ONE 320, 321
TELESAT 164, 197
TELESERVICE 311, 314
TELESTAR 006
TELETECH 215
TELEVES 006, 067
TELEWIRE 059
TENSAI 025, 094
TEVION 116
THOMSON 060, 049, 067, 128,
155, 164, 171, 172,
191, 205, 206, 211
THORENS 225
THORN 067
THORN-FERGUSON 023, 048, 067
TIOKO 135, 175
TLEWIRE 059
TOKAI 033
TONNA 060, 006, 013,
059, 067, 171, 210
TOPFIELD 011
TORX 341
TOSHIBA 067, 145
TPS 129, 205
TRENDLINE 222
TRENDPLAIN 222
TRGRA 088
TRIAD 085, 101, 127, 193, 194
TRIASAT 006, 220
TRIAX 060, 006, 033,
047, 211, 220, 230
TRISTAR 025
TUDI 327
TWINNER 115, 119
UNIDEN 058, 071, 080, 148, 208
UNISAT 033, 054, 175
UNITED CABLE 330, 341
UNITOR 051, 094
UNIVERSUM 003, 009, 071,
164, 165, 176
VAIADIGITAL 078
VARIOSAT 176
VARIOSTAT 176
VECTOR 178
VENTANA 033, 037
VESTEL 165
VIASAT 016
VIDEOCRYPT 023
VIDEOTRON 331
VIDEOWAY 331
VIDIO WAY 015
VIPER 054
VIRGIN MEDIA 063
VISIOPASS 309, 313, 329
VISIOSAT 060, 194, 200
VIVA 161, 162
VORTEC 017, 082, 083, 132, 142
VTECH 127, 194, 200, 204
WELA 060, 163, 169, 186
WESTMINSTER 335
WETEKOM 006, 197, 207
WEWA 067
WIBO 175
WINERSAT 094
WINTERGARTEN 168
WISI 006, 047, 067, 088,
123, 127, 164, 169,
176, 194, 200, 210
WITTENBERG 071
WOLSEY 085, 122
WOORISAT 179
WORLD 094
WORLDSAT 171, 172
XCOM 169
XCOM MULTIMEDIA 046
XRYPTON 226
XSAT 060, 046, 166, 169
YES 189
ZAUNKONIG 161
ZEHNDER 051, 080, 114, 127, 135
165, 179, 204, 226, 255
ZENITH 034, 314
ZETA-TECHNOLOGY 033
ZODIAC 180
ZWERGNASE 163, 175
Code page
Art 40-60
User guide
151
Notes
Art 40-60
User guide
152
Notes
146

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Loewe Art 50 - SL2 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Loewe Art 50 - SL2 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 6,37 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Loewe Art 50 - SL2

Loewe Art 50 - SL2 Snelstart handleiding - Nederlands - 46 pagina's

Loewe Art 50 - SL2 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 154 pagina's

Loewe Art 50 - SL2 Snelstart handleiding - Deutsch - 44 pagina's

Loewe Art 50 - SL2 Snelstart handleiding - English - 44 pagina's

Loewe Art 50 - SL2 Snelstart handleiding - Français - 44 pagina's

Loewe Art 50 - SL2 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 154 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info